PRINTWARE INC
S-1/A, 1996-06-27
COMPUTER PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT, NEC
Previous: FLAG INVESTORS INTERNATIONAL FUND INC, NSAR-A, 1996-06-27
Next: VICTORY PORTFOLIOS, N-30D, 1996-06-27



<PAGE>
   
     AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON JUNE 27, 1996
    
 
   
                                                      REGISTRATION NO. 333-03629
    
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
                            ------------------------
   
                                AMENDMENT NO. 2
                                       TO
                                    FORM S-1
                             REGISTRATION STATEMENT
                                     UNDER
                           THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
    
                             ---------------------
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
             (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)
 
<TABLE>
<S>                               <C>                             <C>
           MINNESOTA                           3577                             41-1522267
(State or other jurisdiction of    (Primary Standard Industrial    (I.R.S. Employer Identification No.)
 incorporation or organization)    Classification Code Number)
</TABLE>
 
                            ------------------------
 
                           1270 EAGAN INDUSTRIAL ROAD
                               ST. PAUL, MN 55121
                                 (612) 456-1400
              (Address, including zip code, and telephone number,
       including area code, of registrant's principal executive offices)
                            ------------------------
 
                             DANIEL A. BAKER, PH.D.
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
                           1270 EAGAN INDUSTRIAL ROAD
                               ST. PAUL, MN 55121
                                 (612) 456-1400
           (Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number,
                   including area code, of agent for service)
                            ------------------------
 
                                    COPY TO:
 
       Richard D. McNeil, Esq.               Michele D. Vaillancourt, Esq.
        Mary S. Giesler, Esq.                  Trevor V. Gunderson, Esq.
     Lindquist & Vennum P.L.L.P.               Winthrop & Weinstine, P.A.
           4200 IDS Center                      3000 Dain Bosworth Plaza
         80 South 8th Street                     60 South Sixth Street
     Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402             Minneapolis, Minnesota 55402
            (612) 371-3211                           (612) 347-0700
 
                            ------------------------
 
          APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE TO PUBLIC:
AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE AFTER THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT.
                            ------------------------
 
    If  any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on
a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to  Rule 415 under the Securities Act  of
1933, check the following box: / /
 
    If  this Form  is filed  to register  additional securities  for an offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box
and list  the  Securities  Act  registration statement  number  of  the  earlier
effective registration statement for the same offering: / /
                            ------------------------
 
    If  this Form  is a post-effective  amendment filed pursuant  to Rule 462(c)
under the Securities Act,  check the following box  and list the Securities  Act
registration  statement number  of the earlier  effective registration statement
for the same offering: / /
                            ------------------------
 
    If delivery of the prospectus is expected  to be made pursuant to Rule  434,
please check the following box: / /
 
                        CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                               PROPOSED            PROPOSED
         TITLE OF EACH CLASS OF            AMOUNT TO BE    MAXIMUM OFFERING   MAXIMUM AGGREGATE      AMOUNT OF
      SECURITIES TO BE REGISTERED         REGISTERED (1)  PRICE PER UNIT (2)  OFFERING PRICE (2)  REGISTRATION FEE
<S>                                       <C>             <C>                 <C>                 <C>
Common Stock, no par value..............    1,840,000           $7.00            $12,880,000         $4,441.02
</TABLE>
 
(1)  Includes  240,000 shares  of  Common Stock  issuable  upon exercise  of the
    Underwriters' over-allotment option.
 
(2) Estimated  solely  for  the  purpose of  calculating  the  registration  fee
    pursuant to Rule 457.
                            ------------------------
 
    THE  REGISTRANT HEREBY  AMENDS THIS REGISTRATION  STATEMENT ON  SUCH DATE OR
DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT SHALL
FILE A  FURTHER  AMENDMENT  WHICH SPECIFICALLY  STATES  THAT  THIS  REGISTRATION
STATEMENT  SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE IN  ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(A) OF
THE SECURITIES ACT  OF 1933  OR UNTIL  THE REGISTRATION  STATEMENT SHALL  BECOME
EFFECTIVE  ON SUCH DATE AS THE COMMISSION, ACTING PURSUANT TO SAID SECTION 8(A),
MAY DETERMINE.
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
 
                             CROSS REFERENCE SHEET
 
                   PURSUANT TO ITEM 501(B) OF REGULATION S-K
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
ITEM NUMBER AND CAPTION                                                          LOCATION IN PROSPECTUS
- ----------------------------------------------------------------  -----------------------------------------------------
<S>        <C>                                                    <C>
1.         Forepart of the Registration Statement and Outside
            Front Cover Page of Prospectus......................  Outside Front Cover Page; Inside Front Cover Page
 
2.         Inside Front and Outside Back Cover Pages of
            Prospectus..........................................  Inside Front Cover Page; Additional Information;
                                                                   Outside Back Cover Page
 
3.         Summary Information, Risk Factors and Ratio of
            Earnings to Fixed Charges...........................  Outside Front Cover Page; Prospectus Summary; Risk
                                                                   Factors
 
4.         Use of Proceeds......................................  Prospectus Summary; Use of Proceeds
 
5.         Determination of Offering Price......................  Outside Front Cover Page; Underwriting
 
6.         Dilution.............................................  Dilution
 
7.         Selling Security Holders.............................  Principal and Selling Shareholders; Outside Front
                                                                   Cover Page; Inside Front Cover Page; Underwriting
 
8.         Plan of Distribution.................................  Outside Front Cover Page; Underwriting
 
9.         Description of Securities to be Registered...........  Prospectus Summary; Dividend Policy; Capitalization;
                                                                   Description of Capital Stock
 
10.        Interest of Named Experts and Counsel................  Not Applicable
 
11.        Information with Respect to the Registrant...........  Outside Front Cover Page; Prospectus Summary; Risk
                                                                   Factors; Capitalization; Selected Financial Data;
                                                                   Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
                                                                   Condition and Results of Operations; Business;
                                                                   Management; Certain Transactions; Principal and
                                                                   Selling Shareholders; Description of Capital Stock
 
12.        Disclosure of Commission Position on Indemnification
            for Securities Act Liabilities......................  Not Applicable
</TABLE>
<PAGE>
INFORMATION   CONTAINED  HEREIN  IS  SUBJECT   TO  COMPLETION  OR  AMENDMENT.  A
REGISTRATION STATEMENT  RELATING TO  THESE SECURITIES  HAS BEEN  FILED WITH  THE
SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION. THESE SECURITIES  MAY NOT BE  SOLD NOR MAY
OFFERS TO BUY BE ACCEPTED PRIOR  TO THE TIME THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT  BECOMES
EFFECTIVE.  THIS  PROSPECTUS  SHALL  NOT  CONSTITUTE AN  OFFER  TO  SELL  OR THE
SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY NOR SHALL THERE BE ANY SALE OF THESE  SECURITIES
IN  ANY STATE IN WHICH SUCH OFFER,  SOLICITATION OR SALE WOULD BE UNLAWFUL PRIOR
TO REGISTRATION OR QUALIFICATION UNDER THE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY SUCH STATE.
<PAGE>
   
                   SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED JUNE 27, 1996
    
PROSPECTUS
 
                                1,600,000 SHARES
 
                                     [LOGO]
 
                                  COMMON STOCK
                                ----------------
 
    Of the 1,600,000 shares of Common Stock offered hereby, 1,200,000 are  being
sold  by Printware, Inc.  ("Printware" or the "Company")  and 400,000 shares are
being  sold   by  the   Selling  Shareholders.   See  "Principal   and   Selling
Shareholders." The Company will not receive any of the proceeds from the sale of
the shares by the Selling Shareholders.
 
    Prior to this offering (the "Offering"), there has been no public market for
the Common Stock of the Company and no assurance can be given that a market will
develop  or be maintained after the Offering. It is currently estimated that the
initial public offering  price will be  between $6.00 and  $7.00 per share.  See
"Underwriting"  for  the factors  considered in  determining the  initial public
offering price. The Company has applied for  listing of the Common Stock on  the
Nasdaq National Market under the symbol "PRTW."
                             ---------------------
 
    THE  COMMON STOCK OFFERED HEREBY  INVOLVES A HIGH DEGREE  OF RISK. SEE "RISK
FACTORS" BEGINNING ON PAGE 5 OF THIS PROSPECTUS.
                              -------------------
 
       THESE SECURITIES  HAVE NOT  BEEN APPROVED  OR DISAPPROVED  BY  THE
       SECURITIES  AND  EXCHANGE  COMMISSION  OR  ANY  STATE  SECURITIES
        COMMISSION NOR HAS THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION  OR
           ANY  STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION PASSED UPON THE ACCURACY
            OR ADEQUACY OF THIS PROSPECTUS. ANY REPRE  SENTATION TO
                      THE CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                               PROCEEDS TO
                                     PRICE TO          UNDERWRITING        PROCEEDS TO           SELLING
                                      PUBLIC           DISCOUNT(1)          COMPANY(2)         SHAREHOLDERS
<S>                             <C>                 <C>                 <C>                 <C>
   Per Share..................          $                   $                   $                   $
    Total(3)..................          $                   $                   $                   $
</TABLE>
 
(1) The Company and the Selling Shareholders,  on a pro rata basis, have  agreed
    to  pay R. J. Steichen & Company,  as the representative of the Underwriters
    (the "Representative"), a nonaccountable expense allowance equal to 2.0%  of
    the  total Price to  Public for all  shares purchased. The  Company has also
    agreed to sell to the Representative, for nominal consideration, a five-year
    warrant (the "Representative's Warrant") to purchase up to 120,000 shares of
    Common Stock exercisable at a price per share equal to 120% of the per share
    Price to Public.  The Company and  the Selling Shareholders  have agreed  to
    indemnify  the Underwriters  against certain  liabilities, including certain
    liabilities  under   the   Securities  Act   of   1933,  as   amended.   See
    "Underwriting."
 
(2)  Before  deducting estimated  offering expenses  payable of  $393,000, which
    includes the portion  of the nonaccountable  expense allowance described  in
    Note 1 above which is being paid by the Company.
 
(3)  The Company  and the Selling  Shareholders have granted  the Underwriters a
    30-day option to purchase  up to 240,000 additional  shares of Common  Stock
    solely  to cover over-allotments, if  any. To the extent  that the option is
    exercised, the Underwriters will offer the additional shares at the Price to
    Public shown above. If the option is  exercised in full, the total Price  to
    Public,  Underwriting Discount, Proceeds to  Company and Proceeds to Selling
    Shareholders will be $       , $       , $       and $       , respectively.
    See "Underwriting."
 
    The shares  of Common  Stock are  offered  by the  Underwriters on  a  "firm
commitment"  basis  subject to  prior  sale when,  as  and if  delivered  to and
accepted by the  Underwriters and  subject to their  right to  reject orders  in
whole  or in part.  It is expected that  delivery of the  shares of Common Stock
will be made on or about            , 1996 in Minneapolis, Minnesota.
                              [R.J. STEICHEN LOGO]
 
                The date of this Prospectus is            , 1996
<PAGE>
 
                         [Inside Front Cover Graphics]
 
Photo:                      Printware's Model 3240 Platesetter
 
Text above photo:           Printware, Inc. is a leader in Computer-to-Plate
                             Systems, which produce offset printing plates
                             faster and less expensively than traditional
                             methods.
 
Text below photo:           Printware's Model 3240 Platesetter, sold under the
                             Mitsubishi name, produces photographic offset
                             printing plates directly from a computer.
 
    PRIOR TO THIS OFFERING,  THE COMPANY HAS NOT  BEEN SUBJECT TO THE  REPORTING
REQUIREMENTS  OF THE SECURITIES  EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934.  AFTER COMPLETION OF THIS
OFFERING, THE COMPANY INTENDS TO DISTRIBUTE TO ITS STOCKHOLDERS AN ANNUAL REPORT
CONTAINING  AUDITED  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  AND  QUARTERLY  REPORTS   CONTAINING
UNAUDITED  FINANCIAL INFORMATION  FOR THE  FIRST THREE  QUARTERS OF  EACH FISCAL
YEAR.
 
    IN CONNECTION WITH THIS OFFERING,  THE UNDERWRITER MAY OVER-ALLOT OR  EFFECT
TRANSACTIONS WHICH STABILIZE OR MAINTAIN THE MARKET PRICE OF THE COMMON STOCK OF
THE  COMPANY AT  A LEVEL ABOVE  THAT WHICH  MIGHT OTHERWISE PREVAIL  IN THE OPEN
MARKET. SUCH TRANSACTIONS MAY BE EFFECTED ON THE NASDAQ NATIONAL MARKET, IN  THE
OVER-THE-COUNTER  MARKET OR  OTHERWISE. SUCH  STABILIZING, IF  COMMENCED, MAY BE
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.
 
                                       2
<PAGE>
                               PROSPECTUS SUMMARY
 
    THE  FOLLOWING SUMMARY INFORMATION IS QUALIFIED  IN ITS ENTIRETY BY THE MORE
DETAILED INFORMATION  AND  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  AND  NOTES  THERETO  APPEARING
ELSEWHERE  IN THIS  PROSPECTUS. SEE "RISK  FACTORS" FOR A  DISCUSSION OF CERTAIN
FACTORS  TO  BE  CONSIDERED  BY  PROSPECTIVE  INVESTORS.  EXCEPT  AS   OTHERWISE
INDICATED,  ALL INFORMATION  IN THIS PROSPECTUS  (I) ASSUMES NO  EXERCISE OF THE
UNDERWRITERS' OVER-ALLOTMENT OPTION, (II) DOES NOT INCLUDE UP TO 120,000  SHARES
OF  COMMON STOCK  ISSUABLE UPON  EXERCISE OF  THE REPRESENTATIVE'S  WARRANT, AND
(III) REFLECTS A ONE-FOR-FOUR REVERSE SPLIT OF THE COMMON STOCK EFFECTIVE  APRIL
25,  1996. SEE "DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL  STOCK." THIS PROSPECTUS CONTAINS FORWARD
LOOKING STATEMENTS THAT  INVOLVE RISKS AND  UNCERTAINTIES. THE COMPANY'S  ACTUAL
RESULTS   MAY   DIFFER  SIGNIFICANTLY   FROM  THE   RESULTS  DISCUSSED   IN  THE
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS.
 
                                  THE COMPANY
 
   
    Printware, Inc. ("Printware" or the  "Company") designs, builds and  markets
"Computer-to-Plate"  systems which are  used by the  offset printing industry to
create printing plates directly  from computer data.  These systems replace  the
traditional process of typesetting, paste-up, camera work and processing film to
produce  a printing plate. Computer-to-Plate  technology provides one-step plate
making (including  text,  graphics  and photographic  halftones)  directly  from
computer  data,  much  as a  laser  printer  makes printed  pages  directly from
computer data. The key benefits of Computer-to-Plate technology are lower costs,
faster turnaround  times,  fewer pieces  of  equipment and  fewer  environmental
limitations   on  disposal  of  by-products.  The  key  hardware  element  of  a
Computer-to-Plate system is  called a Platesetter,  which produces the  printing
plate  by imaging the computer data on  the physical plate material. The Company
sells Platesetters, supplies for use in Platesetters and raster image processors
for connecting  the Platesetter  to the  customer's computer  network. Sales  of
supplies accounted for approximately 55% of the Company's 1995 revenues.
    
 
    The   Company  is   a  leader  in   the  development   and  introduction  of
Computer-to-Plate systems. To date the  Company has sold over 300  Platesetters,
which  it  believes is  more  than any  other  single competitor.  The Company's
marketing strategy is to offer a wide range of Computer-to-Plate products to the
broad market of "mainstream"  printers who use small  format (18" wide or  less)
presses, typically for high-volume printing applications such as check printing,
social  printing  (such  as  wedding  invitations)  and  envelope  printing. The
Company's  customers  include  leading  printers  such  as  Deluxe   Corporation
("Deluxe"),  Pitney  Bowes,  Thomson  Publishing,  Liberty  Check  Printers  and
Northrup-Grumman.
 
   
    The Company  currently manufactures  two lines  of Platesetters  in  various
configurations. The end-user price ranges from $75,000 to $150,000 for the Model
1440, depending on the configuration, and from $85,000 to $100,000 for the Model
3240.  The Company markets the  Model 1440 through its  own sales force, and the
Model 3240 is marketed by Mitsubishi Imaging (MC), Inc. ("Mitsubishi") under its
name. Both  of  these  Platesetter  lines  use  patented  resonant  galvanometer
technology   which  was  licensed  to  the   Company  by  Minnesota  Mining  and
Manufacturing Company  ("3M")  when  the  Company was  organized  in  1985.  The
resonant  galvanometer technology  provides precise  scanning of  the laser beam
which writes the digital image on the blank plate. In 1993 the Company began  to
focus exclusively on Computer-to-Plate products and phased out its manufacturing
of  laser printers and film imagers.  Phasing out of these lower-margin products
resulted  in  a  reduction   in  revenue  in  1993   and  1994.  The  focus   on
Computer-to-Plate  products resulted in an  improvement in profitability in 1994
and 1995 due to the higher margins provided by those products and lower research
and development and sales and marketing expenditures.
    
 
    The Company is  incorporated in  Minnesota and has  its principal  executive
office  and  manufacturing facility  at 1270  Eagan  Industrial Road,  St. Paul,
Minnesota 55121. Its telephone number is (612) 456-1400.
 
                                       3
<PAGE>
                                  THE OFFERING
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                            <C>
COMMON STOCK OFFERED BY THE COMPANY..........  1,200,000 shares
COMMON STOCK OFFERED BY THE SELLING
 SHAREHOLDERS................................  400,000 shares
COMMON STOCK OUTSTANDING AFTER THE
 OFFERING....................................  4,829,713 shares(1)
USE OF PROCEEDS..............................  Product development, sales and marketing  and
                                                working capital
PROPOSED NASDAQ NATIONAL MARKET SYMBOL.......  PRTW
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1)  Does not  include, as of  March 30,  1996 (i) 135,567  shares issuable upon
    exercise of stock options  held by executive officers  and employees of  the
    Company,  (ii) 120,000 shares issuable upon exercise of the Representative's
    Warrant, and (iii) 5,000 shares issuable  upon exercise of warrants held  by
    Deluxe.
 
                           RISK FACTORS AND DILUTION
 
    An  investment in the Common Stock involves a high degree of risk. See "Risk
Factors." Purchasers will experience immediate  and substantial dilution in  net
tangible book value per share. See "Dilution."
 
                             SUMMARY FINANCIAL DATA
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                            --------------------------           YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                             MARCH 30,      APRIL 1,    -----------------------------------------
                                                1996          1995          1995          1994          1993
                                            ------------  ------------  ------------  ------------  -------------
<S>                                         <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
  Revenues................................  $  1,832,013  $  1,807,623  $  8,388,148  $  6,626,925  $   7,296,484
  Gross margin............................       721,967       806,752     3,384,192     2,524,524      1,951,965
  Income (loss) from operations...........       304,555       330,105     1,554,183       622,184     (1,213,897)
  Net income (loss)(1)....................       330,898       326,483     1,793,425       784,029     (1,204,707)
  Net income (loss) per common and common
   equivalent share(1)....................      $.09          $.09          $.48          $.21         $(.33)
  Weighted average common and common
   equivalent shares outstanding(2).......     3,705,403     3,705,627     3,705,627     3,685,580      3,635,226
</TABLE>
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                         AS OF MARCH 30, 1996
                                                                                     -----------------------------
                                                                                        ACTUAL     AS ADJUSTED(3)
                                                                                     ------------  ---------------
<S>                                                                                  <C>           <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
  Cash and cash equivalents........................................................  $  2,795,856   $   9,695,856
  Working capital..................................................................     4,491,641      11,391,641
  Total assets.....................................................................     5,396,406      12,296,406
  Shareholders' equity.............................................................     4,655,666      11,555,666
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1) Net income in 1994 includes an extraordinary item of $140,927, consisting of
    a  gain  on  extinguishment  of  debt.  The  income  per  common  and common
    equivalent share attributable to such extraordinary gain was $.04.
 
(2) See Note 1 to Financial  Statements for an explanation of the  determination
    of weighted average common and common equivalent shares outstanding.
 
(3)  As adjusted to reflect the sale  of shares offered hereby, assuming a Price
    to Public  of $6.50  per share,  and the  application of  the estimated  net
    proceeds  therefrom of $6.9 million. See "Use of Proceeds" and "Management's
    Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations."
 
                                       4
<PAGE>
                                  RISK FACTORS
 
    AN  INVESTMENT IN THE COMMON STOCK OFFERED  HEREBY INVOLVES A HIGH DEGREE OF
RISK. IN EVALUATING THE COMPANY  AND ITS BUSINESS, PROSPECTIVE INVESTORS  SHOULD
CAREFULLY  CONSIDER  THE  FOLLOWING  RISK  FACTORS  IN  ADDITION  TO  THE  OTHER
INFORMATION  IN  THIS  PROSPECTUS.  THIS  PROSPECTUS  CONTAINS  FORWARD  LOOKING
STATEMENTS  WITHIN THE MEANING OF SECTION 27A  OF THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933 AND
SECTION 21E OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934. ACTUAL RESULTS COULD  DIFFER
SIGNIFICANTLY  FROM  THOSE  PROJECTED IN  THE  FORWARD LOOKING  STATEMENTS  AS A
RESULT, IN PART, OF THE RISK FACTORS SET FORTH BELOW.
 
   
    DEPENDENCE ON CERTAIN CUSTOMERS.   The Company is  heavily dependent on  two
customers, Deluxe and Mitsubishi. Sales to these customers represented 41.7% and
17.5%,  respectively, of 1995 revenues and 43.0% and 2.1%, respectively, of 1994
revenues. Deluxe is a provider of checks and related electronic-based  financial
systems.  As of March 30,  1996 Deluxe owned 51.3%  of the Company's outstanding
Common Stock and  two of  its executive officers  are members  of the  Company's
Board  of  Directors.  Mitsubishi is  a  world  wide supplier  of  equipment and
supplies  to  the  printing  industry  and  markets  the  Company's  Model  3240
Platesetter  under Mitsubishi's trade name. Loss of either of these customers or
a substantial reduction in their purchases would have a material adverse  effect
on  the Company. See "Business --  Overview," "Business -- Customers -- Revenues
from Deluxe" and "Certain Transactions."
    
 
   
    DEPENDENCE ON CERTAIN SUPPLIERS.   The Company is  dependent on several  key
single-source   suppliers,  including   the  supplier   of  its   planned  Adobe
PostScript-Registered  Trademark-  raster  image  processor,  the  raster  image
processing  software used  in its  ZAPrip-Registered Trademark-  product and the
plate materials which the Company sells for the Model 1440. The Company has  not
identified or qualified alternate suppliers for the materials now being obtained
from  single  sources. All  of the  Company's agreements  with suppliers  can be
canceled by either party under certain circumstances. Furthermore, there can  be
no   assurance  that  technical  or  other   problems  might  not  cause  supply
interruptions. Such  interruptions  could  seriously  jeopardize  the  Company's
ability  to provide  products that  are critical  to the  Company's business and
operations. See "Business--Suppliers."
    
 
   
    DEPENDENCE ON LIMITED PRODUCT  LINE.  The Company's  business is focused  on
Computer-to-Plate products for the offset printing industry and its product line
is  limited to the  Model 3240 Platesetter,  three variations of  the Model 1440
Platesetter and Model 1440  consumable supplies. Thus  the Company's ability  to
generate  revenue is dependent on a limited  number of products in a single line
of business. A material decline in  revenues from any of the Company's  products
could have a material adverse effect on the Company which might not be offset by
revenues from other products. See "Business--Products."
    
 
    COMPETITION.   The Company  faces considerable competition  in its business.
Most of  the Company's  competitors and  potential competitors  are  established
companies  that have  significantly greater  financial, technical  and marketing
resources than  the  Company. There  can  be  no assurance  that  the  Company's
competitors  will not succeed in developing and marketing products which perform
better or are less expensive than  those developed and marketed by the  Company,
or  that  would  render  the  Company's  products  and  technology  obsolete  or
noncompetitive. There can be no  assurance that competition might not  adversely
affect  the profitability or  viability of the  Company's supplies business. The
Company is highly dependent on its  ability to develop new products with  higher
performance  and lower  costs, and there  can be no  assurance these development
efforts will be successful. See "Business--Competition."
 
   
    OPERATING RESULTS.    The  Company  has experienced  net  income  (loss)  of
$330,898  for the  three months ended  March 30, 1996  and $1,793,425, $784,029,
($1,204,707), ($2,543,602) and $103,077  for the five  years ended December  31,
1995,  1994, 1993, 1992 and 1991, respectively. As of March 30, 1996 the Company
had an accumulated deficit of $10,866,572. Although the Company has reported net
income in the last two years and the first quarter of 1996, no assurance can  be
given  that  the  Company's  operations  will  continue  to  be  profitable. See
"Selected Financial Data,"  "Management's Discussion and  Analysis of  Financial
Condition and Results of Operations" and "Financial Statements."
    
 
    RAPID  TECHNOLOGICAL AND MARKET  CHANGES.  Certain  segments of the printing
industry are  characterized  by  rapid technological  change  and  the  frequent
introduction of new products. The Company's future success
 
                                       5
<PAGE>
will  depend, in part, on its ability to develop and introduce new products that
take advantage of technological advances and to respond promptly to new customer
requirements. There can be no assurance that a shift to large-format presses  or
higher-quality  color  printing  might  not render  the  Company's  products and
technology obsolete. Technology such as xerographic printers, digital presses or
electronic publishing  could replace  offset printing,  rendering the  Company's
current  products and  technology obsolete. There  can be no  assurance that the
Company's resonant galvanometer  technology will remain  competitive with  other
types of laser scanners. See "Business--Competition."
 
   
    PROTECTION  OF  PROPRIETARY  TECHNOLOGY.   Printware  seeks  to  protect its
proprietary technology  by  seeking  patents or  entering  into  confidentiality
agreements  with employees  and suppliers,  depending on  the circumstances. The
Company holds patents or is the licensee of patented technology covering certain
aspects of its Platesetters. There can  be no assurance that such patent  rights
will  not be challenged, rendered unenforceable, invalidated or circumvented, or
that the rights granted thereunder or under licensing agreements will provide  a
competitive  advantage to the Company. Efforts  to legally enforce patent rights
can involve substantial expense and may not be successful. Further, there can be
no assurance  that others  will not  independently develop  similar or  superior
technologies  or duplicate any technology developed  by the Company, or that the
Company's technology will  not infringe upon  patents or other  rights owned  by
others.  Thus the patents held  by or licensed to the  Company may not afford it
any meaningful competitive advantage.  There can also be  no assurance that  the
Company's  confidentiality agreements will provide  meaningful protection of the
Company's proprietary  information.  The  Company's inability  to  maintain  its
proprietary  rights  could  have  a material  adverse  effect  on  its business,
financial  condition  and  results  of  operations.  See  "Business--Proprietary
Rights."
    
 
    DEPENDENCE  ON KEY PERSONNEL; LACK OF  EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS.  The Company's
success depends  in large  part on  its  ability to  attract and  retain  highly
qualified  management,  technical and  marketing personnel.  The Company  has no
employment agreements with any of its management or other personnel and,  except
for  $300,000 of key person  coverage on Dr. Baker,  has no key person insurance
covering any  such  individuals. Competition  for  such personnel  is  generally
intense  and there can be no assurance that  the Company will be able to attract
and retain the  personnel necessary  for the  development and  operation of  its
business.  The  loss of  the services  of  key personnel  could have  a material
adverse effect on  the Company's  business, financial condition  and results  of
operations. See "Management."
 
    CONCENTRATION  OF OWNERSHIP.  Following this Offering, Deluxe, the Company's
current principal shareholder, will continue  to own approximately 32.9% of  the
outstanding Common Stock. Two executive officers of Deluxe serve as directors of
the  Company.  Two of  the  Company's other  directors,  Donald Mager  and Allen
Taylor, will also own  after this Offering 8.1%  and 7.1%, respectively, of  the
outstanding  Common Stock. Accordingly, Deluxe and Messrs. Mager and Taylor will
have the ability to control the election of the Company's Board of Directors and
most corporate actions. This concentration of ownership may also have the effect
of delaying or preventing a change in control of the Company. See "Principal and
Selling Shareholders."
 
    NO PRIOR PUBLIC  MARKET; POSSIBLE  STOCK PRICE  VOLATILITY.   Prior to  this
Offering,  there has been no public market for the Common Stock and there can be
no assurance that an active trading market for the Common Stock will develop  or
be  sustained following this Offering. The initial public offering price will be
determined through negotiations between the  Company and the Representative  and
may  bear no  relationship to  the price  at which  the Common  Stock will trade
following this Offering. There can be no assurance that future market prices  of
the Common Stock will not be lower than the initial offering price. In addition,
the  stock market historically has experienced volatility which has affected the
market price  of securities  of  many companies  and  which has  sometimes  been
unrelated  to the operating performance of  such companies. Announcements of new
products  and  services  by  the  Company  or  its  competitors,   technological
innovations,  developments with respect to  patents or other proprietary rights,
changes in stock  market analyst  recommendations regarding  the Company,  other
technology  companies  or the  Company's industry  generally and  other external
factors, as well  as period-to-period  fluctuations in  the Company's  financial
results,  may have a significant effect on the market price of the Common Stock.
See "Underwriting."
 
                                       6
<PAGE>
    SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE; REGISTRATION RIGHTS.  Sales of Common Stock
in the public market after this Offering could adversely affect the market price
of the  Common Stock.  Unless purchased  by  an affiliate  of the  Company,  the
1,600,000  shares of  Common Stock to  be sold  in this Offering  will be freely
transferable without restriction. Upon conclusion of this Offering, in  addition
to the shares being sold hereby, 748,876 shares of Common Stock will be eligible
for  sale in  the public market  without registration. Certain  of the Company's
existing shareholders, holding  2,383,425 shares  of Common  Stock, have  agreed
that they will not, without the consent of the Representative, sell or otherwise
dispose  of any  equity securities  of the  Company for  a period  of six months
following the  effective date  of this  Offering. However,  sale of  substantial
amounts  of shares  in the public  market following that  period could adversely
affect the market  price of  the Company's  Common Stock.  In addition,  certain
shareholders  holding 109,961 shares of Common  Stock have the right, subject to
certain conditions, to participate in future Company registrations and to  cause
the Company to register certain Common Stock owned by them. See "Shares Eligible
For Future Sale."
 
    POSSIBLE  ISSUANCES OF PREFERRED STOCK; ANTI-TAKEOVER PROVISIONS.  The Board
of Directors is authorized  to issue up to  1,000,000 shares of Preferred  Stock
and  to  fix the  rights,  preferences, privileges  and  restrictions, including
voting rights,  of  those shares  without  any further  vote  or action  by  the
Company's  shareholders. The rights of  the holders of the  Common Stock will be
subject to, and may be adversely affected  by, the rights of the holders of  any
Preferred  Stock that may be issued in  the future. Although there is no current
intention to do so,  the issuance of  Preferred Stock could  have the effect  of
delaying,  deferring or  preventing a  change in  control of  the Company, which
could deprive the Company's shareholders  of opportunities to sell their  shares
of  Common Stock  at a  premium. Additionally,  the Company  could adopt  in the
future one  or more  additional anti-takeover  measures, such  as a  shareholder
rights  plan, without first  seeking shareholder approval,  which measures could
also make a change in control of the Company more difficult. The Company is also
subject to  provisions  of the  Minnesota  Business Corporation  Act  that  make
certain  business  combinations or  potential acquisitions  of the  Company more
difficult. See "Description of Capital Stock."
 
    DILUTION.  Purchasers of shares of Common Stock in this Offering will  incur
immediate  and  substantial  dilution of  $4.11  per share.  Investors  may also
experience additional dilution as a result of the exercise of outstanding  stock
options and warrants. See "Dilution" and "Shares Eligible for Future Sale."
 
    NO  DIVIDENDS.  The Company has never  paid any cash dividends on its Common
Stock and does not anticipate paying such dividends for the foreseeable  future.
See "Dividend Policy."
 
                                       7
<PAGE>
                                USE OF PROCEEDS
 
    The  net  proceeds  to be  received  by the  Company  from the  sale  of the
1,200,000 shares of Common Stock offered by the Company hereby, after  deducting
the  estimated underwriting discount and offering  expenses, are estimated to be
approximately $6.9  million ($8.0  million if  the Underwriters'  over-allotment
option  is exercised in full)  at an assumed offering  price of $6.50 per share.
The Company will not receive any of  the proceeds from the sale of Common  Stock
by  the  Selling  Shareholders.  The Company  intends  to  apply  these proceeds
approximately as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                       <C>
Product development.....................................  $3,200,000
Sales and marketing.....................................  1,800,000
Working capital.........................................  1,900,000
                                                          ---------
  Total.................................................  $6,900,000
                                                          ---------
                                                          ---------
</TABLE>
 
    The amounts  actually  expended  for each  purpose  may  vary  significantly
depending  upon numerous factors,  including the success  of product development
efforts, market conditions and customer preferences. Pending application of  the
net  proceeds described above, the Company intends to invest the net proceeds of
this Offering in short-term, interest-bearing, investment-grade securities.
 
                                DIVIDEND POLICY
 
    The Company has  never declared  or paid any  cash dividends  on its  Common
Stock.  The Company currently intends  to retain any future  earnings for use in
developing its business and does not anticipate paying any cash dividends on its
Common Stock in the foreseeable future.
 
                                 CAPITALIZATION
 
    The following table sets forth the Company's capitalization as of March  30,
1996,  giving retroactive  effect to  the authorization  of 1,000,000  shares of
Preferred Stock and  as adjusted to  give effect  to the sale  of the  1,200,000
shares of Common Stock being offered by the Company at an assumed offering price
of $6.50 per share and the application of the estimated net proceeds therefrom.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                            MARCH 30, 1996
                                                                                    ------------------------------
                                                                                      ACTUAL(1)      AS ADJUSTED
                                                                                    --------------  --------------
<S>                                                                                 <C>             <C>
Long-term debt....................................................................  $     --        $     --
Shareholders' equity:
  Preferred Stock, no specified par value; 1,000,000 shares authorized; no shares
   issued and outstanding.........................................................        --              --
  Common Stock, no par value, 15,000,000 shares authorized, 3,629,713 shares
   issued and outstanding, and 4,829,713 shares issued and outstanding, as
   adjusted(2)....................................................................      15,522,238      22,422,238
  Accumulated deficit.............................................................     (10,866,572)    (10,866,572)
                                                                                    --------------  --------------
    Total shareholders' equity....................................................       4,655,666      11,555,666
                                                                                    --------------  --------------
      Total capitalization........................................................  $    4,655,666  $   11,555,666
                                                                                    --------------  --------------
                                                                                    --------------  --------------
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1)  Derived from the  Company's unaudited financial  statements. See "Financial
    Statements."
 
(2) Does not  include, as of  March 30,  1996 (i) 135,567  shares issuable  upon
    exercise  of stock options held by executive officers and other employees of
    the  Company,   (ii)  120,000   shares  issuable   upon  exercise   of   the
    Representative's  Warrant, and (iii) 5,000  shares issuable upon exercise of
    warrants held by Deluxe.
 
                                       8
<PAGE>
                                    DILUTION
 
    The net  tangible  book value  of  the Company  as  of March  30,  1996  was
$4,622,060  or $1.27 per share. Net tangible book value per share represents the
total amount of the Company's tangible assets reduced by the amount of its total
liabilities and divided  by the number  of shares of  Common Stock  outstanding.
After giving effect to the sale by the Company of the 1,200,000 shares of Common
Stock  offered hereby (after  deducting the underwriting  discount and estimated
offering expenses payable by the Company) at an initial public offering price of
$6.50 per  share, and  without taking  into  account any  other changes  in  net
tangible  book value after March 30, 1996, the pro forma net tangible book value
of the Company at March 30, 1996 would have been $11,522,060 or $2.39 per share.
This represents an immediate  increase in net tangible  book value of $1.12  per
share  to the Company's  existing shareholders and an  immediate dilution in net
tangible book value  of $4.11 per  share to new  investors. The following  table
illustrates this per share dilution:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                           <C>        <C>
Assumed public offering price per share.....................             $    6.50
    Net tangible book value per share at March 30, 1996.....  $    1.27
    Increase per share attributable to new investors........       1.12
                                                              ---------
Pro forma net tangible book value per share after this
 Offering...................................................                  2.39
                                                                         ---------
Dilution per share to new investors.........................             $    4.11
                                                                         ---------
                                                                         ---------
</TABLE>
 
    The  following table summarizes as of March 30, 1996, the differences in the
total consideration paid and  the average price per  share paid by the  existing
shareholders  and  the new  investors with  respect to  the 1,200,000  shares of
Common Stock to be issued  by the Company. The  calculations in this table  with
respect  to  shares of  Common Stock  to be  purchased by  new investors  in the
Offering reflect an assumed Price to Public of $6.50 per share (before deducting
the underwriting  discount  and  estimated  offering  expenses  payable  by  the
Company):
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                         SHARES PURCHASED         TOTAL CONSIDERATION
                                      -----------------------  --------------------------   AVERAGE PRICE
                                        NUMBER      PERCENT       AMOUNT        PERCENT       PER SHARE
                                      ----------  -----------  -------------  -----------  ---------------
<S>                                   <C>         <C>          <C>            <C>          <C>
Existing shareholders(1)............   3,629,713      75.15%   $  15,522,238      66.56%      $    4.28
New investors(1)....................   1,200,000      24.85%       7,800,000      33.44%      $    6.50
                                      ----------  -----------  -------------  -----------
    Total...........................   4,829,713     100.00%   $  23,322,238     100.00%
                                      ----------  -----------  -------------  -----------
                                      ----------  -----------  -------------  -----------
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1) Sales by the Selling Shareholders in this Offering will reduce the number of
    shares  held by existing  shareholders to 3,229,713 shares,  or 66.9% of the
    total number of shares of Common Stock to be outstanding after the Offering,
    and will increase the  number of shares held  by new investors to  1,600,000
    shares,  or  33.1% of  the  total number  of shares  of  Common Stock  to be
    outstanding after the Offering.
 
    The computations  in the  tables above  exclude, as  of March  30, 1996,  an
aggregate  of 140,567 shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options
and warrants at a weighted average exercise  price of $3.00 per share and up  to
120,000  shares of Common  Stock issuable upon  exercise of the Representative's
Warrant. See "Description of Capital Stock" and "Underwriting."
 
                                       9
<PAGE>
                            SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
 
    The following selected financial data as of December 31 and for each of  the
five  years in  the period  ended December  31, 1995  has been  derived from the
financial statements of the Company which have been audited by Deloitte & Touche
LLP, independent  auditors,  whose report  on  the financial  statements  as  of
December  31, 1995 and 1994 and for each  of the three years in the period ended
December 31, 1995 appears elsewhere in this Prospectus. The financial data as of
March 30, 1996 and for the three month periods ended March 30, 1996 and April 1,
1995 has been  derived from  the Company's unaudited  financial statements.  The
unaudited  financial  statements  reflect,  in the  opinion  of  management, all
adjustments (consisting solely of normal recurring adjustments) necessary for  a
fair  presentation of  the Company's  financial position  as of  these dates and
results of  operations for  such  periods. The  results  of operations  for  any
interim  period are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for
the  entire  year.  See  "Management's  Discussion  and  Analysis  of  Financial
Condition and Results of Operations" and "Financial Statements."
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                        THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                      ----------------------                     YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                      MARCH 30,    APRIL 1,   -------------------------------------------------------------
                                         1996        1995        1995        1994        1993         1992         1991
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
<S>                                   <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>          <C>          <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues from non affiliates........  $1,125,959  $1,005,934  $4,889,761  $3,775,958  $ 4,348,484  $ 8,059,260  $ 9,012,735
Revenues from affiliates(1).........     706,054     801,689   3,498,387   2,850,967    2,948,000    2,600,734    5,272,575
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Total revenues......................   1,832,013   1,807,623   8,388,148   6,626,925    7,296,484   10,659,994   14,285,310
Cost of revenues....................   1,110,046   1,000,871   5,003,956   4,102,401    5,344,519    8,234,092    8,907,147
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Gross margin........................     721,967     806,752   3,384,192   2,524,524    1,951,965    2,425,902    5,378,163
Research and development expenses...     178,941     205,778     757,131     956,807    1,314,355    1,913,431    1,829,219
Selling, general and administrative
 expenses...........................     238,471     270,869   1,072,878     945,533    1,851,507    3,022,684    3,394,216
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Income (loss) from operations.......     304,555     330,105   1,554,183     622,184   (1,213,897)  (2,510,213)     154,728
Other income (expense), net.........      32,843       8,378     261,742      22,918       10,299      (31,214)     (47,651)
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Income (loss) before income taxes
 and extraordinary income...........     337,398     338,483   1,815,925     645,102   (1,203,598)  (2,541,427)     107,077
Income taxes........................       6,500      12,000      22,500       2,000        1,109        2,175        4,000
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Income (loss) before extraordinary
 item...............................     330,898     326,483   1,793,425     643,102   (1,204,707)  (2,543,602)     103,077
Extraordinary income(2).............      --          --          --         140,927      --           --           --
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Net income (loss)...................  $  330,898  $  326,483  $1,793,425  $  784,029  $(1,204,707) $(2,543,602) $   103,077
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Net income (loss) per common and
 common equivalent share(3):
  Income (loss) before extraordinary
   item.............................  $      .09  $      .09  $      .48  $      .17  $      (.33) $      (.84) $       .03
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
  Net income (loss)(2)..............  $      .09  $      .09  $      .48  $      .21  $      (.33) $      (.84) $       .03
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Weighted average common and common
 equivalent shares outstanding(3)...   3,705,403   3,705,627   3,705,627   3,685,580    3,635,226    3,025,699    3,000,390
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
                                      ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                        DECEMBER 31,
                                         MARCH 30,    APRIL 1,   ----------------------------------------------------------
                                            1996        1995        1995        1994        1993        1992        1991
                                         ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------
<S>                                      <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Cash and cash equivalents..............  $2,795,856  $  626,267  $2,568,852  $  860,668  $1,288,821  $  561,655  $   98,551
Current assets.........................   5,232,381   3,464,348   5,087,328   3,255,959   4,371,149   4,826,294   5,620,695
Working capital........................   4,491,641   2,643,532   4,151,595   2,292,562   1,441,554   2,544,209   2,173,719
Total assets...........................   5,396,406   3,669,342   5,252,401   3,476,928   4,633,747   5,180,631   6,097,071
Shareholders' equity...................   4,655,666   2,848,526   4,316,668   2,513,531   1,704,152   2,898,546   2,650,095
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
   
(1)  All  but an  immaterial  portion of  revenues  from affiliates  consists of
    revenues from sales to Deluxe Corporation.
    
 
   
(2) During  1994  the  Company  recognized an  extraordinary  gain  of  $140,927
    resulting  from the extinguishment of debt. The income per common and common
    equivalent share attributable to such extraordinary gain was $.04.
    
 
   
(3) See Note 1 to Financial Statements as to method of calculation.
    
 
                                       10
<PAGE>
                    MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
                 FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
OVERVIEW
   
    Printware  designs,  builds  and  markets  Computer-to-Plate  systems  which
provide  faster,  less  expensive  production  of  offset  printing  plates. The
Company's products,  called Platesetters,  make  printing plates  directly  from
computer  data, primarily  for high-volume printing.  In 1988  the Company began
selling its first  Platesetter, the  Model 1440  electrostatic Platesetter.  The
Company  also sold laser printers  and film imagers. In  1993 Printware began to
focus exclusively on Computer-to-Plate products and phased out its manufacturing
of laser printers and film imagers.  Phasing out of these lower margin  products
resulted  in a reduction in total revenues in 1993 and 1994. Revenues from laser
printers and film imagers declined from  approximately $3.40 million in 1992  to
approximately $65,000 for 1995. The phase out of laser printers and film imagers
also  resulted in an  improvement in profitability  in 1994 and  1995 due to the
higher margins provided  by Computer-to-Plate  products and  lower research  and
development  and sales and marketing expenditures.  Prototype shipments of a new
photographic Platesetter, the Model 3240,  began in late 1993. First  deliveries
of the production version were made in 1995.
    
 
    Revenues  are generated  from the sale  of Printware's Model  1440 and Model
3240 Platesetters, as well as from the sale of consumable supplies for the Model
1440. Sales of photographic Platesetters have increased rapidly since production
began in  1994.  The  Company  anticipates that  future  sales  of  photographic
Platesetters  will grow faster  than sales of  electrostatic Platesetters. There
can be no assurance, however, that this growth will continue.
 
    Sales of supplies  used in Model  1440 Platesetters comprised  approximately
55%  of the Company's 1995 revenues. In  addition to equipment and supplies, the
Company separately charges for installation, training, service and spare  parts.
Company  technicians  provide  telephone  support as  well  as  on-site service.
Printware also  trains  its  customers'  technicians  for  self-sufficiency  and
maintains  a significant  spare-parts inventory  to support  its installed base.
Revenues related to installation, training  and support are recognized when  the
services  are performed.  Printware has  contracts with  many of  its Model 1440
customers to  provide preventive  and  emergency maintenance.  Such  maintenance
contracts  generally have  a one-year  term. Telephone  and on-site  support are
billed per incident for customers without support contracts. Printware  provides
a 90-day warranty on its products, which may be extended to up to one year based
on additional customer supplies purchases.
 
   
    The  Company's largest customer, accounting for  41.7% and 43.0% of 1995 and
1994 revenues, is Deluxe, to whom the Company sells both equipment and supplies.
Revenues from sales to  Deluxe constitute all but  an immaterial portion of  the
revenues  from affiliates referred to in the Company's financial statements. The
breakdown of affiliate  revenues in  1995 was  approximately 10%  from sales  of
equipment,  76%  from supplies  and 14%  from  other sales  (principally spares,
repairs and research and  development). The breakdown  of affiliate revenues  in
1994  was approximately 26% from equipment, 60% from supplies and 14% from other
sales. Supplies  revenues  are more  recurring  and predictable  than  equipment
revenues,  and the Company has entered into an agreement with Deluxe under which
Deluxe has agreed to  purchase a minimum annual  amount of paper printing  plate
material  for  each of  1995, 1996  and 1997  at a  fixed price.  This agreement
resulted in  an increase  in the  Company's supplies  sales to  Deluxe in  1995,
compared  to prior years, and  the Company does not  anticipate any reduction in
revenues from supplies sold to Deluxe in 1996 and 1997. Revenues from  equipment
sales  to  end-user  customers  tend  to be  more  variable  than  revenues from
supplies. The Company  has not sold  any Platesetter equipment  to Deluxe  since
September 1995. Deluxe is under no contractual obligation to continue purchasing
equipment  from the Company and  the Company does not know  of any plans for new
equipment orders by Deluxe. See "Certain Transactions."
    
 
   
    Deluxe has recently announced a  major consolidation program concerning  its
entire  operations  and  specifically  the  operations  that  utilize  the paper
printing plate  materials  that it  purchases  from Printware.  Deluxe  has  not
indicated  to the Company that it intends to reduce the amount of printing which
uses the paper printing plate material supplied by the Company, and the  Company
believes  that  Deluxe's consolidation  program will  not materially  affect the
Company's revenues from paper printing plate materials to Deluxe until at  least
the  end  of 1997.  See  "Business --  Customers  -- Revenues  from  Deluxe" and
"Certain Transactions."
    
 
                                       11
<PAGE>
    Research and  development efforts  are focused  on enhancing  and  improving
existing   products  and  supplies  and  developing  new  Platesetter  versions.
Management estimates that  87% of  product (non-service) revenues  in 1995  were
from  products  introduced within  the prior  three  years. Future  research and
development expenses  are expected  to increase  as a  result of  the  Company's
strategy to broaden its Platesetter line. There can be no assurance, however, of
attaining revenues from this effort.
 
    Printware believes its selling expenses are relatively low compared to other
companies  in similar industries. Printware's  two largest customers, Deluxe and
Mitsubishi, are house accounts and no commissions are paid on those sales.  Most
of  Printware's  selling  expenses  are related  to  the  direct  selling effort
associated with  the Model  1440  Platesetter product  line. These  efforts  are
currently  aimed  at  high-volume  printers in  printing  niches  such  as check
printing, social printing, technical/legal publishing, and newspapers, which the
Company has found can best utilize the product. The Company reaches these niches
with targeted  marketing approaches  such as  trade shows,  direct mailings  and
sales  calls. Consistent  with this targeted  approach, there  is currently very
little advertising for the Model 1440. Sales and marketing expenses are expected
to increase considerably  as the  Company attempts to  broaden its  distribution
network.
 
    Except  for historical information, the matters discussed in this Prospectus
are forward looking statements which involve risks and uncertainties,  including
but  not limited to  economic, competitive, and  technological factors affecting
the Company's operations, markets, products, services, prices and other factors,
which may cause actual results to  differ materially from the results  discussed
in the forward looking statements.
 
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
    The  following table summarizes the percentage of revenues for various items
in the Company's Statements of Operations for the periods indicated:
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                          THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                      --------------------------                      YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                        MARCH 30,     APRIL 1,    ---------------------------------------------------------------
                                          1996          1995         1995         1994         1993         1992         1991
                                      -------------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
<S>                                   <C>            <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>
Revenues from non affiliates........        61.5%         55.6%        58.3%        57.0%        59.6%        75.6%        63.1%
Revenues from affiliates............        38.5          44.4         41.7         43.0         40.4         24.4         36.9
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Total revenues......................       100.0         100.0        100.0        100.0        100.0        100.0        100.0
Cost of revenues....................        60.6          55.4         59.7         61.9         73.2         77.2         62.4
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Gross margin........................        39.4          44.6         40.3         38.1         26.8         22.8         37.6
Research and development expenses...         9.8          11.4          9.0         14.4         18.0         17.9         12.8
Selling, general and administrative
 expenses...........................        13.0          15.0         12.8         14.3         25.4         28.4         23.8
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Income (loss) from operations.......        16.6          18.2         18.5          9.4        (16.6)       (23.5)         1.0
Other income (expense), net.........         1.8           0.5          3.1          0.3          0.1         (0.3)        (0.3)
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Income (loss) before income taxes
 and extraordinary item.............        18.4          18.7         21.6          9.7        (16.5)       (23.8)         0.7
Income taxes........................         0.3           0.6          0.2          0.0          0.0          0.0          0.0
Extraordinary income................       --            --           --             2.1        --           --           --
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
Net income (loss)...................        18.1%         18.1%        21.4%        11.8%       (16.5)%      (23.8)%        0.7%
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
                                          ------     -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------  -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 30, 1996 COMPARED TO THREE MONTHS ENDED APRIL 1, 1995
 
   
    REVENUES.   First-quarter total  revenues  in 1996  were $1.83  million,  an
increase of 1% over first-quarter 1995 total revenues of $1.81 million. This was
the  sixth  consecutive  quarter  in which  total  revenues  increased  from the
corresponding quarter in  the previous year.  Total revenues were  up despite  a
decrease  in supplies sales. Supplies revenues declined to $900,000 in the first
quarter of 1996 from $1.06 million in the first quarter of 1995. This was due in
part to several customers who determined that they had excess supplies inventory
and cut back their purchases in the  first quarter of 1996. Model 3240  revenues
for the 1996 period increased 53% compared to 1995, primarily due to an increase
in  unit sales.  Management expects  the Model  3240 to  continue to  provide an
increasing portion of Printware's revenues in the long term. Model 1440 revenues
also increased in the first quarter  of 1996. Revenues from non affiliates  were
up  $120,000 due primarily to strong  Model 3240 sales. Revenues from affiliates
were down $96,000 in the first quarter of
    
 
                                       12
<PAGE>
   
1996  due to unusually strong raster image  processor sales in the first quarter
of 1995  which  did not  recur  in 1996.  Management  expects that,  because  of
anticipated  supplies  revenues  from Deluxe,  anticipated  total  revenues from
affiliates through 1997 will remain at approximately current levels.
    
 
    GROSS MARGIN.  The Company's gross margin was $722,000 in the first  quarter
of  1996 compared to $807,000  in the comparable 1995  period. Gross margin as a
percentage of revenues declined from 45% in the first quarter of 1995 to 39%  in
the  first quarter  of 1996.  The lower margin  in 1996  was due  primarily to a
change in the product mix towards the lower-margin Model 3240 Platesetter.
 
    RESEARCH AND  DEVELOPMENT  EXPENSES.    Research  and  development  expenses
decreased  to $179,000 in the  first quarter of 1996  from $206,000 in the first
quarter of 1995. Although research and development labor expenses were up 10% in
1996, expenses associated with the Model 3240 declined as the product design was
completed.
 
   
    SELLING,  GENERAL  AND  ADMINISTRATIVE  EXPENSES.    Selling,  general   and
administrative  expenses decreased to $238,000 in the first quarter of 1996 from
$271,000  in  the  first  quarter   of  1995.  Selling  expenses  decreased   by
approximately  $10,000 in the first quarter from  1995 to 1996, due primarily to
eliminating the  remaining laser-printer  salesperson  subsequent to  the  first
quarter  of 1995. Legal  expenses in the 1996  period were approximately $15,000
less than in the  1995 period, primarily because  of unusually high expenses  in
the  1995 period associated with a dispute  with A.B. Dick Company. The expenses
on that  matter were  ultimately netted  against the  arbitration award  to  the
Company, which was recognized as other income in the third quarter of 1995.
    
 
    INTEREST,  OTHER INCOME AND INCOME TAXES.  Interest, other income and income
taxes were $26,000 in the 1996 period compared to $4,000 in 1995. The change was
primarily caused by an  increase in net interest  income to $33,000 from  $8,000
due  to higher  cash balances (cash  and short-term cash  investments were $2.80
million at March 30, 1996, compared to  $626,000 at April 1, 1995). Tax  expense
decreased  to $7,000  in 1996  from $12,000 in  1995. Tax  expense is relatively
small because  the  Company  has  net operating  loss  carryforwards  which  are
available   to  offset  against  taxable  income.  The  Company  is  subject  to
alternative minimum taxes, however.
 
    NET INCOME.  Net income for the first quarter of 1996 was $331,000, or  $.09
per  common and common equivalent  share, up from $326,000  or $.09 per share in
1995, as  lower margins  were more  than  offset by  lower expenses  and  higher
interest income.
 
1995 COMPARED TO 1994
 
   
    REVENUES.   Total revenues were  up 27% to $8.39  million in 1995 from $6.63
million in 1994.  Model 3240  revenues increased 192%  compared to  1994 as  the
Model  3240  gained  customer  acceptance.  Model  3240  revenues  accounted for
approximately 20% of the Company's  total revenue in 1995,  up from 9% in  1994.
Laser  printer revenues declined to $65,000 in 1995 from $491,000 in 1994 as the
Company continued to phase out that  product line to focus on  Computer-to-Plate
products.  Non  affiliate revenues  increased by  $1.11 million  due to  a sharp
increase in unit sales  of the Model 3240  Platesetter line. Affiliate  revenues
increased in 1995 over 1994 by $647,000 due largely to increased supplies sales.
    
 
    GROSS  MARGIN.  The Company's gross margin increased 34% to $3.38 million in
1995 from $2.52 million in 1994, primarily as a result of increased revenues and
prices. Gross margin  as a percentage  of revenues improved  slightly to 40%  in
1995  from  38%  in 1994.  The  basic Model  1440  list price  was  increased by
approximately 15%  in 1995,  and  margins on  Model  1440 supplies  and  service
increased  slightly. The  Model 1440  and supplies  gross margin  increases were
partially offset by a change in product mix towards the lower-margin Model 3240.
 
    RESEARCH AND  DEVELOPMENT  EXPENSES.    Research  and  development  expenses
decreased  to $757,000 in  1995 from $957,000 in  1994. Expenses associated with
the Model 3240 declined as the product design was completed. In 1995 the Company
also relied  more on  raster image  processor software  from third  parties  and
de-emphasized continuing development of its own raster image processor software.
 
    SELLING,   GENERAL  AND  ADMINISTRATIVE  EXPENSES.    Selling,  general  and
administrative expenses increased 13% to $1.07 million in 1995 from $946,000  in
1994.    Selling    expenses    decreased    to    $380,000    in    1995   from
 
                                       13
<PAGE>
$447,000 in 1994 as  the Company continued to  focus on efficiently serving  the
target  markets for the Model 1440 Platesetter. In late 1994 the Company reduced
selling expenses by combining domestic,  international and OEM sales  functions.
General  and administrative expenses  remained at approximately  8% of revenues,
increasing to $693,000 in 1995 from $499,000  in 1994. In 1995 the Company  made
investments   to  upgrade  its  computers,  Internet  link,  information  system
databases and voice mail. Employee profit-sharing also began in 1995.
 
    INTEREST, OTHER INCOME  AND INCOME TAXES.   The Company  had $69,000 of  net
interest  income in  1995, compared to  $23,000 in 1994.  The increase coincided
with the Company's cash position increasing significantly due to cash flow  from
operations  (cash and short-term cash investments  increased to $2.57 million at
the end of 1995 from $861,000 at the end of 1994). Other income in 1995 was  due
to   a  $334,000  arbitration  award  for   A.  B.  Dick  Company's  1994  order
cancellation. Out-of-pocket  arbitration  expenses of  $142,000  were  incurred,
resulting in a net gain of $192,000.
 
    NET  INCOME.  The Company had net income of $1.79 million or $.48 per common
and common  equivalent  share in  1995.  1995 net  income  was 21%  of  revenue,
compared  to 12% in 1994. The improvement in profitability came from significant
revenue growth in 1995 and lower operating expenses (operating expenses were 22%
of revenues in 1995 versus 29% in 1994).
 
    For federal  income  tax  purposes,  the  Company  had  net  operating  loss
carryforwards  of approximately  $10.5 million as  of December 31,  1995. If not
used, these carryforwards will  begin to expire in  2001. Under current tax  law
certain  changes in ownership resulting  from the sale or  issuance of stock may
limit the amount of net operating loss carryforwards which can be utilized on an
annual basis. Management  does not believe  that the Offering  will result in  a
change in ownership which will trigger that limitation.
 
1994 COMPARED TO 1993
 
   
    REVENUES.    Total revenues  declined to  $6.63 million  in 1994  from $7.30
million in 1993. Non affiliate  revenues declined $573,000, which was  primarily
due  to reduced sales of laser printers and film imagers caused by the Company's
shift to Computer-to-Plate products. The  decline was partially offset by  sales
of  the Model 3240  Platesetter, which increased  275% from 1993  to account for
approximately 9% of 1994 revenues. Affiliate revenues declined slightly to $2.85
million in  1994 from  $2.95  million in  1993 due  to  a decrease  in  supplies
revenues that was partially offset by an increase in equipment revenues.
    
 
    GROSS  MARGIN.  Despite lower revenues,  gross margin increased 30% to $2.52
million in 1994, from  $1.95 million in  1993. Gross margin  as a percentage  of
revenues  was 38% in 1994 versus 27% in  1993. The higher margin in 1994 was due
to lower costs, a deliberate move away from lower-margin laser printer and  film
imager  products  and higher  prices. Printware  was able  to raise  the average
selling price of a basic  Model 1440 Platesetter by  15% in 1994. Higher  prices
were  possible because models  introduced in that  year, such as  the Model 1440
ZNX, had new features such as  larger plate-size capability and digital  machine
settings.
 
    RESEARCH  AND DEVELOPMENT.  Research  and development expenses decreased 27%
to $957,000  in 1994  from $1.31  million in  1993. This  was primarily  due  to
completing substantial portions of the Model 3240 product development in 1994.
 
    SELLING,   GENERAL  AND  ADMINISTRATIVE  EXPENSES.    Selling,  general  and
administrative expenses decreased by nearly 50% to $946,000 from $1.85  million.
As  part of  Printware's new mission  to focus  exclusively on Computer-to-Plate
products, direct-selling efforts were targeted  at specific printing niches.  As
part  of that  strategy, in late  1993 the  Company reduced its  sales force and
closed its field sales  offices, centralizing its sales  force in the  Company's
St.  Paul headquarters. These  steps resulted in much  lower selling expenses in
1994 than in the  previous year. Selling expenses  decreased 57% to $447,000  in
1994  from $1.05 million in 1993  (to 7% of revenues in  1994 from 14% in 1993).
General and administrative expenses  decreased to $499,000  (8% of revenues)  in
1994  from  $801,000  (11%  of revenues)  in  1993.  General  and administrative
expenses were high in 1993 due  to reserves recorded for legal disputes  related
to events which occurred in prior years. These disputes were resolved in 1994.
 
    INTEREST,  OTHER INCOME AND  INCOME TAXES.   The Company had  $23,000 in net
interest income in 1994, compared to $10,000 in 1993, as the Company was able to
repay its short-term debt in 1993 with cash flow
 
                                       14
<PAGE>
from operations. Other income  in 1994 came from  a $141,000 extraordinary  gain
from settlement of a debt agreement with Minnesota Technology, Inc. ("MTI"). The
Company issued 5,500 shares of Common Stock to MTI.
 
    NET  INCOME.  The  Company had net  income of $784,000  (12% of revenues) in
1994, compared  to  a  $1.20  million  loss  (17%  of  revenues)  in  1993.  The
improvement in profitability for 1994 came from lower operating expenses (29% of
revenues  in 1994  versus 43% in  1993) and a  higher gross margin  (38% in 1994
versus 27% in 1993). Net income was $.21 per common and common equivalent  share
in 1994, compared to a loss of $.33 per share in 1993.
 
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
 
   
    Prior  to becoming profitable  in 1994, the  Company financed its operations
through private placements of Common Stock, customer prepayments for merchandise
and short-term borrowings. Beginning  in 1994, the Company  was able to  fulfill
prepayment  obligations  and meet  its working  capital and  capital expenditure
requirements from cash  flow from operations.  During 1995, 1994  and 1993,  the
Company  generated  (used)  cash  of  $1.72  million,  ($377,000),  and $70,000,
respectively, from operating activities. During  the first quarter of 1996,  the
Company's  operating  activities  generated  cash  flow  of  $241,000.  Cash and
short-term cash investments were  $2.80 million at March  30, 1996, compared  to
$2.57  million at December 31, 1995 and $626,000 at April 1, 1995. The Company's
current ratio (current assets to current  liabilities) improved to 7.1 at  March
30,  1996,  compared to  5.4 at  December 31,  1995  and 4.2  at April  1, 1995.
Inventories were $1.62 million at March  30, 1996, compared to $1.73 million  at
December 31, 1995 and $2.12 million at April 1, 1995, due to a continuing effort
to  increase  inventory turnover.  The Company  has recorded  inventory reserves
approximating $550,000  at March  30, 1996  and December  31, 1995  and 1994  to
reduce  the  inventory to  its estimated  net  realizable value.  These reserves
result from the continuous modification and upgrading of the Company's products,
the need to provide repair parts for  its installed base of equipment which  are
no  longer in  current production and  price erosion  for electronic components.
Management estimates that the Company will  need to continue to carry  inventory
which  may  exceed  its  net  realizable  value  in  amounts  approximating  the
historical level of the reserve.
    
 
   
    The Company's liquidity was  such that management elected  not to renew  the
Company's  $1 million bank line of credit,  which expired September 1, 1995. The
Company purchased  property and  equipment of  $15,000, $50,000  and $73,000  in
1995,  1994 and 1993, respectively. The Company purchased property and equipment
of $15,000 during  the first quarter  of 1996. The  Company anticipates  capital
expenditures of approximately $100,000 in the remainder of 1996. The Company has
no  material non-cancelable commitments for the purchase of products or services
other than inventory  purchases in the  normal course of  business. The  Company
believes  that existing cash balances and cash generated from operations will be
sufficient to  finance its  existing operations  through at  least December  31,
1997.
    
 
BACKLOG
 
    The  Company's backlog of customer orders  was approximately $3.0 million as
of both March 30, 1996 and April 1, 1995. All backlog orders are expected to  be
filled within one year. Backlog consists primarily of the portion of supplies on
long-term  contracts  expected to  be shipped  within  one year  and Platesetter
orders. The Platesetter backlog as of March 30, 1996 is expected to be filled by
September 30, 1996, although the Company expects additional orders to be  placed
by that time.
 
RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS
 
    In October 1995 the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement of
Financial  Accounting Standards No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation
("SFAS 123"). SFAS 123 requires expanded disclosures of stock-based compensation
arrangements with employees and encourages (but does not require) application of
the fair value recognition provision of SFAS 123 to such arrangements. SFAS  123
is  required  to be  adopted  for reporting  purposes  by the  Company  in 1996.
Companies are permitted, however, to continue to apply APB opinion No. 25, which
recognizes compensation  cost  based  on  the  intrinsic  value  of  the  equity
investment awarded. The Company will continue to apply APB opinion No. 25 to its
stock  based compensation awards to employees and will disclose the required pro
forma effect on net income and earnings per share.
 
                                       15
<PAGE>
                                    BUSINESS
 
GENERAL
 
    Printware designs, builds and markets "Computer-to-Plate" systems which  are
used  by the  offset printing industry  to create printing  plates directly from
computer data. These systems replace the traditional process (see figure  below)
of  typesetting, paste-up, camera work and film processing to produce a printing
plate:
 
                        TRADITIONAL PLATEMAKING PROCESS
 
                                [CHART]
 
Chart:  Drawing  depicting  Traditional  Platemaking  Process  of   typesetting,
        paste-up, camera work and film processing to produce a printing plate.
 
    Computer-to-Plate  technology provides one-step platemaking (including text,
graphics and  photographic halftones)  directly from  computer data,  much as  a
laser  printer  makes  printed pages  directly  from computer  data  (see figure
below):
 
                           COMPUTER-TO-PLATE PROCESS
 
                                    [CHART]
 
Chart:  Drawing depicting Computer-to-Plate  Process in  which a  plate is  made
        directly from computer data.
 
    The key benefits of Computer-to-Plate technology are:
 
    - Lower costs from savings in supplies and labor
 
    - Faster turnaround times
 
    - Fewer pieces of equipment
 
    - Fewer environmental limitations on by-product disposal
 
    Some of the Company's customers have found that Computer-to-Plate technology
can  reduce their  costs for some  printing operations  by up to  50%. The check
printing, social  printing  and  envelope  printing  segments  of  the  printing
industry  have  been  early adopters  of  Computer-to-Plate  technology, largely
because of higher volumes and early computerization.
 
                                       16
<PAGE>
   
    The  key  hardware  element  of  a  Computer-to-Plate  system  is  called  a
Platesetter,  which produces the printing plate  by imaging the computer data on
the physical  plate  material.  The  heart  of  Printware's  Platesetters  is  a
high-resolution  laser marker  system, the  key technology  obtained from  3M in
1985. The system is based on a resonant galvanometer, which management  believes
has  certain performance advantages over conventional systems which use rotating
multifaceted mirrors. The  Company's system  uses a proprietary  method where  a
mirror   mounted   on   a   resonating   torsion   bar,   in   conjunction  with
microprocessor-controlled electronics, precisely controls the laser raster scan.
The method  was first  used in  Printware's laser  printers, then  later in  its
Platesetters.  In 1990 Printware's Model 1440 Platesetter received the InterTech
Technology Award  for  Innovative Excellence  from  the Graphic  Arts  Technical
Foundation. This award is reserved for products judged to have the potential for
a  major impact in  the industry. There  can be no  assurance that the Company's
resonant galvanometer technology  will remain  competitive with  other types  of
laser scanners. The Company is continually monitoring and evaluating advances in
relevant  technologies, such as scanning  mirrors and holographic systems, which
could provide cost or performance advantages.
    
 
    Printware was organized in  1985 and began deliveries  in 1987 of its  first
product,  a high resolution  laser printer. In 1988  Printware began selling its
first  Platesetter,  the   Model  1440   electrostatic  Platesetter.   Printware
subsequently  expanded its product  line with new  Platesetter models, new laser
printers and filmsetters. In 1993, however, Printware began to focus exclusively
on Computer-to-Plate  products and  phased  out its  other product  lines.  This
resulted  in reduced revenues in 1993 and 1994, but a significant improvement in
profitability. During this period Printware  completed development of and  began
to  deliver a new  photographic process (silver-halide)  Platesetter, called the
Model 3240, to serve a  broader range of users. The  Model 3240 is marketed  for
the Company by Mitsubishi under Mitsubishi's brand name.
 
INDUSTRY OVERVIEW
 
    According  to Printing Industries  of America ("PIA"),  a trade association,
there were approximately 52,400 printing firms in the United States in 1995. The
Company believes that most of the printing presses installed at these firms  are
small  format (18" wide or less), one and two color presses, which is the market
segment of the printing industry that the Company serves.
 
    Printers in the United States  are rapidly computerizing. Vantage  Strategic
Marketing,  a  market  research  firm,  estimates that  29%  of  print  jobs now
originate electronically  and that  this will  grow  to 53%  by the  year  2000.
Although   only  a  small  percentage  of  printers  now  use  Computer-to-Plate
technology, this  is expected  to grow  rapidly. A  1995 poll  by PIA  of  6,000
printers  in the United  States and Canada indicated  that approximately 6% were
using  Computer-to-Plate  technology.  According  to  PIA,  this  percentage  is
expected  to grow to  33% by 1997.  State Street Consultants,  a consulting firm
which focuses on the  graphic arts industry,  surveyed 232 in-plant,  commercial
and newspaper printers and found in 1995 that:
 
    - 82%  expect Computer-to-Plate technology to be widely accepted by the year
      2000
 
    - 80% expect to buy a Computer-to-Plate system eventually
 
    - nearly 70% of newspapers expect to shift to Computer-to-Plate technology
 
    Mills-Davis, a consulting firm, in  a study commissioned by the  Association
for  Suppliers of Printing and  Publishing Technologies ("NPES"), predicted that
because of competitive pressure  on printers to  increase efficiency and  reduce
costs,  "Direct-to-Plate will be a boom industry  by 1997 and for the years that
follow." According  to  the NPES  QUARTERLY  ECONOMIC FORECAST  for  the  fourth
quarter  of 1995, much of the  growth in imaging/prepress equipment shipments in
the next two years  will stem from the  purchase of computer-related  equipment,
with only a minor portion attributed to gains in traditional prepress equipment.
A  1995 study by Professor Frank Romano of the Rochester Institute of Technology
estimates that  Platesetter  equipment sales  will  exceed $2  billion  for  the
six-year period between 1995 and the year 2000.
 
CUSTOMERS
 
   
    OVERVIEW.   The  Company has  sold over 300  Platesetters to  date, which it
believes, based  on  trade  journal  reports, is  more  than  any  other  single
competitor.    Printware's    customers    include   a    number    of   leading
    
 
                                       17
<PAGE>
printers, such  as  Deluxe,  Pitney Bowes,  Thomson  Publishing,  Liberty  Check
Printers and Northrop-Grumman. Most of the Company's large customers have one or
two year contracts for service and supplies. Sales to Deluxe accounted for $3.50
million  and  $2.85 million  of revenue  in 1995  and 1994,  respectively, which
constituted 41.7% and  43.0% of 1995  and 1994 revenue,  respectively. Sales  to
Mitsubishi, principally of the Model 3240 which it markets for the Company under
Mitsubishi's  brand name, accounted for $1.46 million and $140,000 of revenue in
1995 and 1994, respectively, which constituted  17.5% and 2.1% of 1995 and  1994
revenue,  respectively. The  loss of  Deluxe or Mitsubishi  as a  customer, or a
substantial reduction in their purchases,  would have a material adverse  effect
on the Company. The Company provides a majority of the Platesetter supplies used
by  Deluxe under  a multi-year  contract that  expires at  the end  of 1997. See
"Certain Transactions."
 
   
    REVENUES FROM  DELUXE.   The  Company sells  both equipment  and  consumable
supplies  to Deluxe. In 1994 the Company  entered into a purchase agreement with
Deluxe under which  Deluxe has  agreed to purchase  from the  Company a  minimum
annual  amount of this plate material for each of 1995, 1996 and 1997 at a fixed
price. The 1994 agreement resulted in increased sales of paper plate material by
the Company to Deluxe in 1995, and the Company does not expect any reduction  in
such  revenues  in 1996  and 1997.  Deluxe also  purchases paper  printing plate
material for the Model 1440 from other suppliers.
    
 
   
    During the  period from  1991 to  1995 the  Company sold  to Deluxe  various
Platesetters,  film imagers  and other  equipment under  certain development and
purchase order contracts.  The Company  has no current  commitments from  Deluxe
under  these equipment contracts, except for an order to retrofit certain Deluxe
equipment with the results of a software research and development contract  from
Deluxe which the Company is performing. See "Certain Transactions."
    
 
BUSINESS STRATEGY
    Printware's  strategic  plan is  to continue  to focus  on Computer-to-Plate
products and pursue these specific strategies:
 
    COVER A BROAD RANGE OF MAINSTREAM PRINTING.   In the past several years  the
Company  has focused  on providing  a broad  Computer-to-Plate product  line for
"mainstream" printing,  which management  believes currently  accounts for  most
printing.  The Company  has no plans  to pursue  "high-end" Platesetter business
geared toward  magazine-quality  color  printing  (above  2,400  dots  per  inch
resolution) or large presses over 18" wide.
 
    CUSTOMER  DRIVEN INNOVATION.   The  Company's product  strategy is primarily
driven by customer  requirements, rather than  technology. The Company  believes
that  this  strategy  will  allow  it to  bring  products  and  services  to the
marketplace with the best chance of  success. The Company endeavors to have  all
areas  of the Company maintain a close relationship with current and prospective
customers.
 
    INCREMENTAL INNOVATION FROM  CORE PRODUCTS.   Printware's  philosophy is  to
develop  new products from modules and  technologies that are already available,
either within Printware or  from third parties. The  Company believes that  this
philosophy  will allow the Company to broaden its product line without excessive
research and development expenses or inordinate technical risks.
 
    MAINTAIN EXCEPTIONAL  QUALITY.   The  Company  believes that  its  customers
demand  near-perfect  quality, and  that quality  demands  will increase  in the
future. The Company maintains  a detailed problem  reporting system and  devotes
considerable engineering resources to improving designs and promptly eliminating
problems.  The Company  has improved and  broadened its  incoming inspection and
vendor quality efforts.  Especially in  the area  of supplies,  the Company  has
tightened its specifications in response to customer requirements and instituted
more  rigorous  testing programs.  Management believes  that these  efforts have
resulted in significant quality improvements in recent years.
 
PRODUCTS
   
    The Company makes two lines of Platesetters, the Model 3240 Platesetter line
for digital photographic  (silver-halide) plates  and the Model  1440 family  of
digital  electrostatic Platesetters. Photograhic  Platesetters use silver-halide
based chemistry  in which  the plate  is chemically  developed and  fixed  after
exposure.  Electrostatic Platesetters use a process  where toner is fused onto a
plate in  the  image areas.  The  Company  also sells  service  and  proprietary
supplies (primarily digital plate material for the Model 1440 product line).
    
 
                                       18
<PAGE>
    MODEL 3240 PLATESETTER.  This versatile product uses commodity silver-halide
plate material for a wide range of printing applications. The product is sold by
Mitsubishi  under  its brand  name internationally  and through  several leading
domestic graphic arts dealers, giving it  broad market coverage. The Model  3240
is  approximately 3' wide by 4' high by  4' long, and consists of two integrated
modules: an  imager module,  where a  laser "writes"  the digital  image on  the
plate;  and a processor module, where the  plate is developed and fixed, similar
to conventional photography.  It has  a liquid-crystal operator  panel to  enter
machine  settings and for checking machine status.  The Model 3240 has input and
output cassettes for  rolls of plate  material. Imaged plates  exit the  machine
into a tray already dried, cut to size and press-ready.
 
    MODEL  1440  PLATESETTER.   This  product  line  has three  models:  one for
economical paper-based plates; another for durable metal plates; and a third for
either paper  or  metal. The  Model  1440 serves  niche  markets such  as  check
printing, social printing and envelope printing. It is sold by the Company's own
sales  force, which has expertise in  the specialized applications served by the
Model 1440. The Model  1440 is approximately 3'  wide by 1 1/2'  high by 2  1/2'
deep,  and has liquid crystal operator panels  to enter machine settings and for
checking machine status. The units have an area to load a roll of plate material
stock, or in the case of the  metal plate version, a plate sheet feeder.  Imaged
plates  exit the machine  into a tray or  into optional post-processing modules.
The Company sells in-line  plate handling modules  for fully automated  systems.
Optional  equipment includes plate converters  for paper plates, plate decoaters
for metal plates and plate sheet feeders for metal plates.
 
    The Model 3240 resolution is 3,240 thousand dots per square inch (1,800 dots
per inch), which is suitable for  high quality color and photographs. The  Model
1440  resolution is 1,440  thousand dots per  square inch (1,200  dpi), which is
suitable for text, graphics and medium-quality photographs. The imaging speed of
the Model 3240  is up to  36 inches  per minute, and  for the Model  1440 is  40
inches  per minute. Based on independent surveys conducted by THE SEYBOLD REPORT
ON PUBLISHING  SYSTEMS ("THE  SEYBOLD REPORT"),  a trade  journal, in  1995  and
PrintCom  Consulting Group in  1996, the Company believes  that its products are
among the fastest Platesetters available.
 
    End-user pricing  is $85,000  to $100,000  for Model  3240 Platesetters  and
$75,000 to $150,000 for Model 1440 Platesetters, depending on the specific model
and  configuration.  The Company  also  provides consulting  services, software,
support and training for the Model 1440. The Company has been able to raise  the
list  prices of  Model 1440  units by more  than 50%  since 1993  because of the
unique value it provides in certain applications.
 
    RASTER  IMAGE  PROCESSORS   (RIPS).    Printware   sells  RIPs  to   connect
Platesetters to the customer's computer network and convert computer data to the
digital  images which appear on the printing plate. The Company's RIPs are fully
compatible with  the  industry-standard  PostScript language  and  most  popular
networks.  The  Company  has  two  RIP models,  the  economical  ZipRip  and the
high-speed ZAPrip.
 
    SUPPLIES.  Printware specifies,  tests and markets  supplies for Model  1440
Platesetters.  These supplies  consist mostly  of digital  laser sensitive plate
material used in  the Platesetter. The  Company also sells  a paper-based  plate
material  for cost-sensitive  applications and an  aluminum-based plate material
for longer-run printing. Approximately 90% of the Company's supplies revenue  is
from  plate materials, but other supplies  sold by the Company include developer
(toner), conversion  solution, press  fountain solution,  dispersant,  decoating
solution and plate gum.
 
    The   Company  believes   that  its   metal  printing   plates  have  unique
environmental advantages over other metal printing plates. Tests conducted by an
engineering consulting  firm  concluded  that by-products  from  processing  the
Company's plates can be disposed of without special treatment. Printware's paper
and  metal printing plates are both recyclable  and contain no heavy metals such
as silver. The Company knows of no other digital plates that can be recycled  as
easily  as its plates. The Company believes that the environmental advantages of
its plates will become increasingly important to printers.
 
    Printware's current  generation of  paper  plate material,  called  Platinum
grade, was introduced in 1995. This plate material uses a zinc-oxide coating and
a  triple  plastic-coated  paper  base stock.  The  Company  believes  that this
plasticized stock  provides  more stability  and  consistency than  other  paper
plates. The plates
 
                                       19
<PAGE>
can  be used  for run lengths  of up  to 5,000 impressions,  handling work which
would otherwise require more expensive  metal or silver-halide plates.  Platinum
plate  material comes in 425-foot  rolls in various widths  up to 16 inches. The
plates are cut  to exact length  by the Platesetter.  The Company believes  that
paper-based  printing plates used in Printware  Platesetters are the lowest cost
digital plates available.
 
   
    PRODUCT WARRANTY.   The Company provides  a 90-day limited  warranty on  its
Platesetters  under which  the Company  will provide  repair or  replacement for
defects in materials  or workmanship.  On Platesetters sold  by Mitsubishi,  the
warranty  covers 90 days  from first installation,  up to a  maximum of 180 days
from shipment  by the  Company. Mitsubishi  also has  the right  to purchase  an
extended  warranty for Model  3240 Platesetters it markets.  For the Model 1440,
the Company  offers parts  under  warranty if  the customer  purchases  supplies
exclusively from Printware for the first year after the Model 1440 is purchased,
or if the customer enters into an extended term agreement to purchase supplies.
    
 
   
    The Company provides a one-year limited warranty on plate materials and most
of  the related  chemical supplies  for the  Model 1440.  This warranty provides
replacement of any defective material returned to the Company. To the extent the
Company experiences warranty claims related to the sale of consumable  supplies,
the  Company has  generally received replacement  supplies or a  credit from the
Company's vendor. The  warranty claims  made to the  Company to  date have  been
minimal for both Platesetters and supplies.
    
 
MARKETING
 
    Printware   has  separate   marketing  strategies  for   its  two  different
Platesetter lines. The Model 3240 Platesetter is sold by Mitsubishi, Printware's
marketing partner, who  sells the Model  3240 to customers  directly or  through
graphic  arts dealers. The  Company has retained  the right to  market the Model
3240 directly or through other marketing  partners. The Model 1440 line is  sold
directly  by Printware's own sales force, which has expertise in the specialized
applications served by the Model 1440.
 
   
    Through  its  original  equipment  manufacturer  ("OEM")  partnership   with
Mitsubishi,  the Company is  enjoying much broader  product exposure. Mitsubishi
began a significant  advertising campaign in  late 1994 to  introduce the  Model
3240  and explain its benefits. Advertisements have been placed in several trade
publications,  including  AMERICAN  PRINTER,   INPLANT  GRAPHICS  and   PRINTING
IMPRESSIONS.  In 1995 the Model 3240 was  introduced at tradeshows in the U. S.,
Canada, Europe and  Japan by Mitsubishi.  Pitman Co., the  largest graphic  arts
dealer  in  the country,  and  other dealers  are  exhibiting and  promoting the
product.
    
 
    The Company  believes  that its  OEM  strategy  for the  Model  3240  allows
Mitsubishi  to add value,  such as brand  awareness, promotion, distribution and
service. Mitsubishi also couples the sale of  the Model 3240 to the sale of  its
plate  material supplies.  The Company believes  that Mitsubishi  is the world's
leading supplier of photographic plate material. The Company has been  satisfied
with  the results of the  Mitsubishi partnership, but there  can be no assurance
that the relationship will continue or that the business level will continue  to
grow.  Currently the supplies marketed  by Mitsubishi for the  Model 3240 do not
materially affect the Company's sales of supplies for the Model 1440.
 
    The Company's goal is to  significantly expand distribution of its  products
in  order to reach a broader  customer base. Management envisions this expansion
taking place gradually as the Computer-to-Plate market grows. The Company  plans
to use a portion of the net proceeds of this Offering to expand its distribution
by  hiring additional sales  and marketing personnel,  expanding advertising and
attending trade shows.
 
RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
 
    Printware has  research  and development  programs  underway or  planned  to
develop   higher   performance   RIPs,   faster   Platesetters   and  lower-cost
Platesetters. The Company believes that these programs are necessary to maintain
its competitive advantage and that  the technology to accomplish these  programs
is  already developed.  The Company  plans to  continue to  make use  of outside
suppliers as part of these development  efforts. No assurance can be given  that
any of these programs will be successful in producing revenue for the Company.
 
    HIGHER-PERFORMANCE RIPS.  The Company is developing a next-generation raster
image  processor using  the current industry  standard Adobe  Level 2 PostScript
software interface. Products using this interface are
 
                                       20
<PAGE>
intended to  be  available  in  1996, and  will  allow  Printware  equipment  to
integrate  more easily with a  wider range of computer  and network systems. The
Company believes that offering the widely-accepted Adobe software interface will
improve the market acceptance of the Company's products. In addition,  Printware
plans  to improve  the speed of  its RIPs with  higher-speed microprocessors and
other higher speed components.
 
    FASTER PLATESETTERS.  Based on independent surveys conducted by THE  SEYBOLD
REPORT  in 1995 and PrintCom Consulting Group in 1996, the Company believes that
its Platesetters are among the fastest in  the industry, with a top speed of  40
inches  per minute. The Company plans to maintain and extend its speed advantage
by developing a next generation of even faster Platesetters. Through changes  in
the  laser marker system, the Company believes  it can increase the speed of its
Platesetters by up to 50%. If this can be accomplished, the Company believes  it
will  provide an important competitive advantage by helping the Company meet the
printing industry's ever-increasing productivity demands.
 
    LOWER-COST PLATESETTERS.  Printware plans  to develop a Platesetter with  an
end-user price in the $50,000 range, compared to $75,000 for Printware's current
lowest-priced  model. Costs  will be reduced  by scaling down  the maximum plate
width to approximately 13"  and by eliminating certain  features. The 13"  width
would  allow printing of up to two 8 1/2" by 11" pages simultaneously, and would
be compatible with a  large number of  small-format printing presses  (sometimes
called  duplicator presses). Management believes that such a product would allow
customers with  lower plate  volumes  to justify  a Platesetter  purchase,  thus
making  it viable for  smaller printing operations in  segments such as business
forms and technical/legal publishing. Printware had completed the development of
such a product for a former OEM partner (A. B. Dick Company) in 1994. A. B. Dick
canceled its orders  for the  product, but the  Company believes  parts of  that
design  can be used in the new  product. A current customer has expressed strong
interest in such  a product, although  pricing and other  supply terms have  not
been  agreed to, and there  is no assurance that  an acceptable supply agreement
can be reached with the customer.
 
    In addition  to new  products, the  Company is  committed to  the  continual
improvement  of its existing products. Based  on the results of rigorous quality
audits, the  Company  believes that  Model  3240 product  quality  has  improved
steadily since its introduction. The product meets the strenuous quality demands
of  the world  market and  a number of  Model 3240  units have  been exported to
Japan. In 1996 the Company introduced  an enhanced external design of the  Model
3240, which is stronger and has a more rounded look.
 
    In  the long term (three  to five years), the  Company plans to develop more
highly  automated  digital  printing  systems  built  around   Computer-to-Plate
technology.  There can be  no assurance that  such a development  effort will be
successful. The  Company  believes  that  there  is  and  will  continue  to  be
significant competition in this area.
 
COMPETITION
 
    The  growth  in the  Computer-to-Plate  business has  attracted considerable
competition. The Company's competitors and potential competitors are established
companies that  have significantly  greater financial,  technical and  marketing
resources  than  the  Company. There  can  be  no assurance  that  the Company's
competitors will not succeed in developing and marketing products which  perform
better  and are less expensive than the  Company's products, or that will render
the Company's products and technology obsolete or noncompetitive in other  ways.
The  Company divides its  competition into four  categories: other platesetters;
film imagers; enhanced xerographic/laser printers; and supplies competitors.
 
    OTHER PLATESETTERS.  The Company believes, based on surveys reported in  THE
SEYBOLD  REPORT and by the PrintCom Consulting  Group and others, that there are
at least  50  Platesetter  models  currently being  marketed  by  more  than  20
companies. THE SEYBOLD REPORT recently identified the four leaders as Printware,
Gerber  Scientific,  Creo Products  and  the Optronics  division  of Intergraph.
Another company, Presstek, a leader in digital presses, has recently  introduced
Platesetters. THE SEYBOLD REPORT noted that: "...Printware has manufactured more
[Platesetters]  than anyone else, giving it an enviable position in the market."
The Company believes  that it  has a  head start  over Platesetter  competition,
although  there can be  no assurance the  Company will be  able to maintain that
advantage.
 
                                       21
<PAGE>
    All major competitors mentioned  above use metal plates,  and most of  their
Platesetters are relatively expensive ($250,000 to $500,000), as they are geared
towards  the relatively small market for  high-end color printing. Creo Products
serves  large  printers,   such  as  magazine   publishers.  Gerber   Scientific
specializes  in  metal  Platesetters, and  Optronics  focuses  on craft-oriented
printing.
 
    Printware's  products  are  focused  at  mainstream,  smaller  presses   and
mid-range  quality,  which  management  believes  currently  accounts  for  most
printing. The Company believes that this type of printing will continue for  the
foreseeable  future, although there  can be no  assurance that a  shift to large
format presses or higher-quality color  printing might not render the  Company's
products  obsolete. From independent industry  surveys, the Company believes its
Platesetters are unmatched  in cost-effectiveness and  speed. Gerber  Scientific
and Presstek have announced lower cost models, but the Company believes they are
still  more expensive to buy and to  operate than Printware's products. All four
major competitors  use metal  plates, which  are much  more expensive  than  the
Printware's  economical  paper  plates. Presstek  has  introduced  a nonmetallic
version of its plate, but the plate  is still much more costly than  Printware's
paper-based  plates. Printware's latest Platesetter  for paper-based plates, the
Model 1440 ZNX,  costs $75,000,  which the Company  believes is  less than  most
competitive  Platesetters. The Company also believes that Printware Platesetters
have the lowest variable platemaking cost of any digital method.
 
    In addition  to  the metal  Platesetter  competition summarized  above,  the
Company  also faces significant competition from other photographic Platesetters
which use  non-metallic printing  plates.  This competition  could  particularly
affect  the Model  3240 photographic  Platesetter. Management  believes the most
significant  of  these   competitors  include  A.   B.  Dick  Company,   Eskofot
International  and PrePress  Systems. The  Company believes  that its advantages
over those products include higher speed, less plate waste and the reputation of
the Mitsubishi brand name.
 
    FILM IMAGERS.  Digital film imagers  are used in the traditional  multi-step
platemaking   process  being  obviated  by  Platesetters.  Several  film  imager
manufacturers are attempting  to adapt  film imagers to  image plates  directly.
Competitors  in  this  category  include  the  Agfa  division  of  Bayer  Corp.,
Linotype-Hell and  ECRM  Incorporated.  From  discussions  with  customers,  the
Company  believes  that  such  "plate-enabled" film  imagers  represent  a slow,
awkward approach, compared to the Company's Platesetters. The Company's  systems
are  fully  daylight-safe  (no  darkrooms)  and  chemical  processing  steps are
contained,   providing   so-called   "dry-to-dry"   operation.   The   Company's
Platesetters  are faster than  most film imagers and,  unlike film imagers, have
virtually no plate waste.
 
    XEROGRAPHIC/LASER PRINTERS.  Enhanced xerographic/laser printers can replace
offset  printing  in  certain  applications,   but  are  currently  limited   to
lower-quality  applications  such  as overseas  check  printing  and low-quality
business forms. These devices  also have a higher  variable cost per  impression
than   Computer-to-Plate  technology.  Companies  in  this  area  include  Check
Technology  Corporation,  Delphax  Systems  and  Xerox  Corporation.  Management
believes that competitors in this area are making efforts to improve the quality
and reduce the cost of their systems, and there can be no assurance that systems
marketed by the Company will sustain their advantage.
 
    SUPPLIES  COMPETITION.   Printware  has  competitors that  sell  paper plate
supplies for Model 1440  Platesetters. The Company is  not aware of  competition
for  metal plates used in the Model 1440. The most significant competitive paper
plate material  is made  by a  Japanese  paper mill  and sold  through a  U.  S.
distributor.  There have also been several  less significant competitors in this
market from time to  time. Printware has addressed  the competitive threat  with
lower  prices  where  appropriate  and  a program  to  improve  the  quality and
consistency of its supplies. The Company believes that competitive materials are
inferior to  Printware  supplies  in  certain respects,  such  as  strength  and
dimensional  stability, but  not inferior  in other  respects. The  Company also
believes that many of its customers would prefer to purchase their supplies from
Printware as the  manufacturer of  the equipment. The  Company expects  supplies
revenues  to grow  at a  modest rate,  but there  can be  no assurance  that the
Company will be able to maintain its product advantage or that competition might
not adversely affect the profitability or viability of its supplies business.
 
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS
 
    PATENTS AND TRADE SECRETS.  Printware's policy is to attempt to protect  its
technology  by seeking patents, maintaining certain trade secrets and continuing
technological innovation. As of March 30, 1996, the
 
                                       22
<PAGE>
   
Company  had rights to 17 patents, consisting of 11 granted to Printware and six
licensed from 3M.  The 3M patents  expire between 2002  and 2004; the  royalties
which  the Company  paid to  3M in  1995, 1994  and 1993  for licenses  of these
patents were not  material to the  Company. The Company's  own patents begin  to
expire  in 2004. There can  be no assurance that such  patent rights will not be
challenged, rendered  unenforceable,  invalidated or  circumvented.  Efforts  to
enforce patent rights can involve substantial expense and may not be successful.
In addition to patents, the Company relies on trade secrets and other unpatented
proprietary  technology.  Printware  seeks  to  protect  its  trade  secrets and
proprietary  know-how  with  confidentiality   agreements  with  employees   and
suppliers.  There can be  no assurance that the  Company's patent portfolio will
provide a competitive advantage in the future, or that the Company's  agreements
will adequately protect the Company's trade secrets.
    
 
   
    PRODUCT  SUPPLY AGREEMENTS.   In  1995 Printware  obtained the non-exclusive
right to use  Adobe Systems'  software interface  for all  of its  Platesetters.
Adobe  originated  the printing  industry  standard PostScript  language  and is
viewed  as  controlling  its  future  evolution.  The  Company  entered  into  a
three-year development and license agreement with a licensee of Adobe to develop
software  to utilize the Adobe  software with the Model  3240 Platesetter and to
supply the combined software  to Printware at defined  prices. The Company  also
has non-exclusive rights for the ZAPrip for fixed prices for an indefinite term,
fonts  in the ZipRip under a current  license amendment through 1997, and to the
plate processor module under  a sale of technology  and parts supply  agreement.
The Company has the exclusive right to sell the proprietary plate materials made
by  its suppliers. The Company  has a supply agreement  for paper plate material
with E.J. Gaisser,  Inc. on  a defined  price basis  and on  an exclusive  basis
subject  to minimum annual volumes. The Company has a supply agreement for metal
plate material  with Polychrome  Corporation on  a defined  price and  exclusive
basis.  All of the product supply agreements to which the Company is a party can
be canceled by  either party  under certain circumstances.  Cancellation of  the
supply  agreements  for  paper  plate material  or  metal  plate  material could
seriously jeopardize the Company's ability to provide products that are critical
to the Company's revenues.
    
 
SUPPLIERS
 
   
    The Company has a number of  single source suppliers for materials that  are
critical to production of its products. For the Model 1440 and Model 3240, these
single   source  suppliers  provide  spherical  mirrors,  galvanometer  mirrors,
application specific integrated circuits and galvanometer torsion bar  material,
all  of which are supplied to the Company  on a purchase order basis, and ZAPrip
dongles which are supplied  under a supply agreement.  For the supplies sold  by
the  Company for the Model 1440, the single source suppliers provide paper plate
material, metal plate material, paper plate toner and metal plate toner, all  of
which  are supplied to  the Company on  a purchase order  basis. Any significant
interruption of supply from any of  these vendors would have a material  adverse
effect  on the  Company. The Company  has not identified  or qualified alternate
suppliers for the materials now being obtained from single sources.
    
 
MANUFACTURING AND FACILITIES
 
    Printware's manufacturing operation consists  of the assembly,  integration,
testing  and  quality audits  of  equipment. The  Company  purchases all  of its
supplies and many of the hardware  components it uses from third-party  vendors,
some  of which  are single-source  vendors. Printware's  principal manufacturing
areas include laser  markers, transport mechanisms,  electronics/RIPs and  final
assembly/test.  Printware  makes  extensive  use  of  computer-aided  design and
transmits most of its fabricated part drawings to its suppliers  electronically.
The  Company believes that  this use of technology  shortens turnaround time and
improves quality.
 
    Printware's offices and  manufacturing facility  are located  at 1270  Eagan
Industrial  Road, St. Paul,  Minnesota. The Company  occupies 35,410 square feet
pursuant to a lease which expires  July 31, 1998. Management believes that  this
facility will be adequate for Printware's needs at least until the expiration of
the  lease. The lease also has an option to extend for three additional years at
then-existing market rates. Monthly rent expense is currently $7,029, plus a pro
rata share of real estate taxes and common area maintenance.
 
                                       23
<PAGE>
EMPLOYEES
 
    As of March  30, 1996, Printware  had 48 employees,  including 44  full-time
employees  and 4 part-time or contract employees. Of the 44 full-time employees,
17 were in manufacturing,  5 were in marketing,  sales and customer service,  14
were  in  research and  development  and 8  were  in general  and administrative
functions. Management  considers  the  future  success  of  the  Company  to  be
dependent  in  part  upon its  continued  ability to  maintain  a highly-skilled
workforce and to attract, motivate and retain qualified employees.  Accordingly,
Printware  began an employee  profit-sharing plan in  1995. The program provides
payments to each non-officer employee  of up to 3%  of salary, depending on  the
Company's performance against quarterly profit goals. No Printware employees are
covered  by  collective  bargaining  agreements and  the  Company  considers its
relationship with its employees to be good.
 
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
 
    The Company is  involved in various  legal actions in  the normal course  of
business. Management is of the opinion that the outcome of such actions will not
have  a significant effect on the Company's financial position or its results of
operations.
 
                                       24
<PAGE>
                                   MANAGEMENT
 
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
 
    The executive officers  and directors of  the Company and  their ages as  of
March 30, 1996 are as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
NAME                               AGE      POSITION WITH COMPANY
- -----------------------------      ---      ----------------------------------------------------------
<S>                            <C>          <C>
Allen L. Taylor, Ph.D.(1)(2)           60   Co-chairman of the Board, Director
Donald V. Mager(2)                     60   Co-chairman of the Board, Director
Daniel A. Baker, Ph.D                  38   President, Chief Executive Officer and Director
Thomas W. Petschauer                   56   Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Joseph F. Dayton                       49   Senior Vice President
Brian D. Shiffman(1)(2)                56   Director, Secretary
Jerry K. Twogood(2)                    55   Director
Charles M. Osborne(1)                  42   Director
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1) Member of the Audit Committee.
 
(2) Member of the Compensation Committee
 
    ALLEN L. TAYLOR, PH.D. has served as Co-chairman of the Board since February
1993  and prior to that time as Chairman of the Board beginning in May 1985. Dr.
Taylor is a  co-founder of the  Company but has  never been an  employee of  the
Company.   He  has  been   an  employee  of   3M  (a  publicly-held  diversified
manufacturer) for  over 30  years  and was  instrumental  in obtaining  for  the
Company in 1985 a license from 3M for the key galvanometer technology.
 
    DONALD  V. MAGER has served as Co-chairman  of the Board since February 1993
and prior to that time was President, Chief Executive Officer and a director  of
the  Company since  May 1985. Mr.  Mager is  a co-founder of  the Company. Since
February 1993 Mr.  Mager has been  a part-time employee  acting in a  consulting
capacity  and is no longer  active in the day-to-day  management of the Company.
Mr.  Mager's  employment  by  the  Company  will  terminate  on  June  1,  1996.
Previously,  he was employed by Sperry Corporation (a publicly-held manufacturer
of computer  systems)  and its  predecessors  for  30 years,  most  recently  as
Director of New Product Ventures.
 
    DANIEL A. BAKER, PH.D. has served as the Company's President and a member of
its  Board of Directors since February 1993 and as Chief Executive Officer since
January 1995. Dr.  Baker joined the  Company in  May 1990 as  Vice President  of
Engineering  and  was later  appointed Vice  President  of Sales,  Marketing and
Product Development. He has  20 years of experience  in high-tech industry,  and
personally   holds  15  patents.  His  previous  experience  includes  executive
positions at Minntech Corporation (a  publicly-held manufacturer of medical  and
industrial  devices) and Percom Data  Corporation (a privately-held manufacturer
of computer peripherals).
 
    THOMAS W. PETSCHAUER  has served as  a Vice President  of the Company  since
June  1985 and was named Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer in
January 1995. Mr.  Petschauer is a  co-founder of  the Company. He  has over  30
years  of  technical, managerial  and business  experience  in the  computer and
peripheral field. Prior to joining Printware, he was Venture Executive at Sperry
Corporation, where he was employed for over 20 years.
 
    JOSEPH F. DAYTON has served as a Vice President of the Company since October
1986 and was named Senior Vice  President of Manufacturing and Customer  Service
in  January 1995. Prior to October 1986 he was employed by E. F. Johnson Company
(a  publicly-held  manufacturer  of  cellular  radio  systems),  where  he  held
increasingly  responsible executive positions in program management, quality and
manufacturing functions.
 
                                       25
<PAGE>
    BRIAN D. SHIFFMAN has served on  the Board of Directors since the  Company's
incorporation in May 1985. Mr. Shiffman has been Business Development Manager at
Minnesota Project Innovation, Inc. since 1991. Previously, Mr. Shiffman was Vice
President  at  the  Minnesota Cooperation  Office,  as a  loaned  executive from
Control Data Corporation, and was instrumental to the formation of the  Company.
Mr.  Shiffman was employed at Control Data Corporation (a publicly-held computer
systems business) for over 20 years.
 
    JERRY K. TWOGOOD has  served on the Board  of Directors since January  1987.
Mr.  Twogood has  been the Executive  Vice President of  Deluxe (a publicly-held
provider of checks and related electronic-based payment systems) since 1987  and
since  November 1995 has been its President of Manufacturing. He has also been a
member of  the Board  of  Directors of  Deluxe since  1987,  where he  has  been
employed  since 1959.  Deluxe owned  51.3% of  the Company's  outstanding Common
Stock as of March 30, 1996 and is one of the Company's major customers.
 
    CHARLES M. OSBORNE joined the Company's Board of Directors in January  1989.
Mr. Osborne has been Deluxe's Chief Financial Officer since 1984 and Senior Vice
President since 1989. He has been employed by Deluxe since 1981. Previously, Mr.
Osborne  was at Deloitte &  Touche LLP, public accountants.  In 1996 Mr. Osborne
completed a term as President of  the Financial Stationers Association. He  also
serves  on the  board of directors  of Graco Corporation  (a publicly-held paint
sprayer  business)  and  of  Computer  Petroleum  Corporation  (a  publicly-held
provider of market research to the petroleum industry).
 
    In  addition to the above executive  officers and directors, the Company has
certain  other  employees  who  the  Company  believes  are  important  to   its
operations.  These key employees are: RODNEY S. CERAR, age 48, who has been with
the Company since March  1992 and has been  Director of Platesetter  Engineering
since  February 1993  and was previously  employed by  ADC Telecommunications (a
publicly-held manufacturer of telecommunications  equipment) from February  1990
to  November 1991 as  Manager of Manufacturing;  ALEXANDER K. KOSS,  age 37, who
joined the Company  in July 1985  and has been  Director of Product  Development
since  August 1994;  TIMOTHY S.  MURPHY, age  32, who  has been  employed by the
Company since October 1987  and has been Director  of Marketing and Sales  since
August 1994; and CORDELL E. LOMEN, age 50, who has been the Company's Controller
since October 1986.
 
    The  Company's Articles of Incorporation provide that the Board of Directors
may consist of up to 11 members. Currently the Board of Directors has 6 members.
Each director  is  elected to  hold  office until  the  next annual  meeting  of
shareholders.
 
    The Company has not paid any fees to members of its Board of Directors, with
the  exception of  Mr. Shiffman,  who receives $750  per quarter  for serving as
Secretary. Under  the  Company's  1996  Stock Plan,  each  of  the  non-employee
directors  (except for Messrs. Osborne and  Twogood) was automatically granted a
non-qualified stock option  for 1,000  shares of  Common Stock  (at an  exercise
price  of $3.00  per share)  on April  25, 1996  when the  Plan was  approved by
shareholders and will be automatically granted an option for an additional 1,000
shares (at an exercise price equal to  the then fair market value of the  Common
Stock)  upon each election or re-election as  a member of the Board of Directors
(see "Stock Plans" below).
 
    There are no family relationships among  any of the Company's directors  and
executive officers.
 
BOARD OF DIRECTORS COMMITTEES
 
    The Board of Directors has established an Audit Committee and a Compensation
Committee. The Audit Committee consists of Messrs. Osborne, Shiffman and Taylor.
This  committee  will review  the Company's  accounting, auditing  and reporting
practices, make recommendations concerning the work of the Company's independent
auditors  and  review  the  adequacy  of  internal  controls.  The  Compensation
Committee  consists  of  Messrs.  Taylor,  Shiffman,  Twogood  and  Mager.  This
committee  is  responsible   for  establishing  salaries,   bonuses  and   other
compensation for the Company's executive officers, and for the administration of
the  1996 Stock  Plan and  the Employee Stock  Purchase Plan.  See "Stock Plans"
below.
 
                                       26
<PAGE>
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
 
    The following table shows the  compensation earned for services rendered  in
all  capacities to the Company by the  President and Chief Executive Officer and
the two other most  highly compensated executive officers  of the Company  whose
salary  and bonuses exceeded $100,000 for the  year ended December 31, 1995 (the
"Named Executive Officers"):
 
                      SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE FOR 1995
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                           LONG-TERM COMPENSATION
                                                ANNUAL COMPENSATION        ----------------------
                                          -------------------------------              SECURITIES
                                                             OTHER ANNUAL              UNDERLYING    ALL OTHER
NAME AND PRINCIPAL POSITION                SALARY    BONUS   COMPENSATION   AWARDS      OPTIONS     COMPENSATION
- ----------------------------------------  --------  -------  ------------  ---------   ----------   ------------
<S>                                       <C>       <C>      <C>           <C>         <C>          <C>
Daniel A. Baker                           $110,000  $44,814  $      0      $   7,500(1)  11,203(2)     $1,413(3)
 President and CEO
Thomas W. Petschauer                        95,000   38,703         0              0     9,675(2)       1,226(3)
 Executive Vice President and CFO
Joseph F. Dayton                            83,000   33,814         0              0     8,453(2)         956(3)
 Senior Vice President
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1)  Represents the value of a restricted  stock award of 2,500 shares  approved
     by the Board of Directors.
 
(2)  Consists  of Incentive Stock Options awarded under the Company's 1995 Bonus
     Plan for executive officers (see "Executive Bonus Plan").
 
(3)  Consists of matching  contributions made  under the  Company's 401(k)  Plan
     (see "401(k) Profit Sharing Plan").
 
    None  of the executive officers and directors  of the Company are parties to
any employment or severance agreements, except for a Change in Control Severance
Agreement with Dr. Baker. This agreement provides that in the event of a  change
in  control of  the Company  followed by  termination of  Dr. Baker's employment
within one  year thereafter,  he will  generally receive  a lump  sum  severance
payment equivalent to two years of compensation.
 
    The  following table summarizes option  grants in 1995 to  each of the Named
Executive Officers:
 
                             OPTION GRANTS IN 1995
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                           POTENTIAL REALIZABLE
                                                                                                             VALUE AT ASSUMED
                                                                                                             ANNUAL RATES OF
                                                          INDIVIDUAL GRANTS                                    STOCK PRICE
                             ----------------------------------------------------------------------------    APPRECIATION FOR
                              NUMBER OF SECURITIES     PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL    EXERCISE OR                      OPTION TERM
                               UNDERLYING OPTIONS        OPTIONS GRANTED      BASE PRICE     EXPIRATION    --------------------
                                     GRANTED            EMPLOYEES IN 1995      PER SHARE        DATE         5%(1)     10%(1)
                             -----------------------  ---------------------  -------------  -------------  ---------  ---------
<S>                          <C>                      <C>                    <C>            <C>            <C>        <C>
Daniel A Baker(2)..........             8,000                   34.4%          $    3.00    Jan. 13, 2005  $  15,093  $  38,250
Thomas W. Petschauer(2)....             7,000                   30.0                3.00    Jan. 13, 2005     13,207     33,469
Joseph F. Dayton(2)........             6,250                   26.9                3.00    Jan. 13, 2005     11,792     29,883
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1)  Represents the  potential net  realizable value  of each  grant of  options
     assuming  that the market price of  the underlying Common Stock appreciates
     in value from its fair market value on the date of grant to the end of  the
     option  term at the indicated annual  rates. As determined by the Company's
     Board of Directors, the fair market value  of the Common Stock on the  date
     of grant of the options described in the table was $3.00 per share.
 
(2)  The options were granted under the 1986 Incentive Stock Option Plan and are
     currently 100% vested.
 
                                       27
<PAGE>
    The  following table  summarizes the value  of options held  at December 31,
1995 by the  Named Executive Officers.  There were no  options exercised by  the
Named Executive Officers during 1995.
 
                             YEAR-END OPTION VALUES
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                          NUMBER OF SECURITIES
                                                               UNDERLYING               VALUE OF UNEXERCISED
                                                         UNEXERCISED OPTIONS AT       IN-THE-MONEY OPTIONS AT
                                                           DECEMBER 31, 1995            DECEMBER 31, 1995(1)
                                                      ----------------------------  ----------------------------
NAME                                                  EXERCISABLE  UNEXERCISABLE(2) EXERCISABLE  UNEXERCISABLE(2)
- ----------------------------------------------------  -----------  ---------------  -----------  ---------------
<S>                                                   <C>          <C>              <C>          <C>
Daniel A. Baker.....................................      18,750         11,203      $  65,625      $  39,211
Thomas W. Petschauer................................      22,125          9,675         77,438         33,863
Joseph F. Dayton....................................      25,700          8,453         89,950         29,586
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------------
 
(1)  The amounts set forth represent the difference between the assumed Price to
     Public of $6.50 per share and the exercise price of the options, multiplied
     by the applicable number of shares underlying the options.
 
(2)  The   unexercisable  options  were   granted  in  January   1996  for  1995
     performance.
 
STOCK PLANS
 
    1996 STOCK PLAN
 
    The shareholders  approved the  Company's 1996  Stock Plan  (the "Plan")  on
April  25, 1996. The Plan  is administered by the  Compensation Committee of the
Board of Directors  and expires on  April 25,  2006. The Plan  provides for  the
grant  of  incentive stock  options within  the  meaning of  Section 422  of the
Internal Revenue Code  of 1986,  as amended (the  "Code"), to  employees of  the
Company   and  non-qualified  stock  options  and  restricted  stock  awards  to
employees, consultants  and directors  of  the Company.  Options and  awards  of
restricted  stock for up to 500,000 shares  of Common Stock are authorized under
the  Plan.  The  Compensation  Committee  has  broad  discretion  to   prescribe
conditions  (such as the completion  of a period of  employment with the Company
following the grant  of an  option to  an employee)  to be  satisfied before  an
option  becomes exercisable. The Plan also provides for the automatic grant of a
non-qualified stock option for  1,000 shares at 100%  of the fair market  value,
fully  vested  upon  grant, exercisable  for  five years,  to  each non-employee
director upon adoption of the  Plan and upon each  election or re-election as  a
member of the Board of Directors.
 
    The  Company's 1986 Incentive  Stock Option Plan  and the Company's original
Incentive Stock Option  Plan have been  utilized to grant  all of the  Company's
options through March 30, 1996. The original plan expired in June 1995. Although
the  1986 Incentive Stock Option Plan will not terminate until October 1996, the
Company decided not to grant any additional options under this plan after  March
30, 1996.
 
    1996 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN
 
    The  Company's 1996 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "Stock Purchase Plan")
was adopted on April  25, 1996 and  provides for the issuance  of up to  100,000
shares  of  Common  Stock.  The  Stock  Purchase  Plan  is  administered  by the
Compensation Committee of the Board  of Directors. With certain exceptions,  all
employees  of the Company who have been employed by the Company for at least six
months and who are employed at least 20 hours per week and at least five  months
per  year, including officers  and directors who are  employees, are eligible to
participate in the  Stock Purchase  Plan. The  Stock Purchase  Plan consists  of
periodic  offerings, with the first  such offering planned to  begin on April 1,
1997. Each  offering  under  the  Stock  Purchase Plan  will  be  for  a  period
determined  by the Compensation Committee of the  Board of Directors, but not to
exceed 27 months. An employee may elect to have up to a maximum of 10%  deducted
from  his or her regular  salary for the purpose  of purchasing shares under the
Stock Purchase Plan. The price at  which the employee's shares are purchased  is
the  lower of (a) 85% of  the closing price of the  Common Stock on the day that
the offering commences or (b)  85% of the closing price  of the Common Stock  on
the day that the offering terminates. No shares have been issued under the Stock
Purchase Plan.
 
                                       28
<PAGE>
401(K) PROFIT SHARING PLAN
 
    The  Company's  401(k)  Profit  Sharing  Plan  (the  "401(k)  Plan")  became
effective August 1, 1994. The 401(k)  Plan is intended to qualify under  Section
401(k)  of the Code. All employees employed  by the Company in the United States
for at least 30 hours per week are eligible to participate in the 401(k) Plan as
of the  next calendar  quarter following  one year  after date  of hire  by  the
Company.  Each  eligible employee  may contribute  to  the 401(k)  Plan, through
payroll deductions,  up  to 15%  of  his or  her  salary, subject  to  statutory
limitations.   The  401(k)  Plan  permits,  but  does  not  require,  additional
contributions to the 401(k) Plan by the Company of up to 2% of the  compensation
paid  by the  Company to  each employee  in the  previous calendar  quarter. The
Company's contributions are made  at the discretion of  the Board of  Directors,
within  the limits of the 401(k) Plan. The Company has made a contribution of 1%
of the  compensation  of each  participating  employee each  quarter  since  the
adoption  of the 401(k) Plan. Under Section 401(k) of the Code, contributions by
employees or  by the  Company  to the  401(k) Plan  and  income earned  on  plan
contributions are not taxable to employees until withdrawn from the 401(k) Plan.
Contributions  by the Company,  if any, will  be deductible by  the Company when
made.
 
EXECUTIVE BONUS PLAN
 
    The Compensation  Committee authorizes  and  approves an  executive  officer
bonus plan ("Bonus Plan") near the beginning of each year based on the Company's
financial plan for the year and based on its view of the overall compensation of
the  executive  officers.  For  1996  the Bonus  Plan  provides  for  a formula-
determined cash payment of up to 52% of the base salary of each of the executive
officers based on the overall  revenues and profit of  the Company in 1996.  The
Compensation  Committee also reserves the right to make additions to the awarded
bonuses based on additional subjective measures of executive officer performance
and achievement. In addition, each executive officer will receive a grant of  an
Incentive  Stock Option  for a  number of shares  of Common  Stock determined by
dividing by  four the  number of  dollars of  Bonus Plan  cash payment  to  each
officer.  These Incentive Stock  Options will be exercisable  at the fair market
value of the Common Stock  on the date of grant,  will be 100% vested after  one
year and will be exercisable for nine years.
 
COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION
 
    Each   of  the  current  non-employee   directors  is  entitled  to  receive
compensation in the form  of cash for their  services as directors. At  present,
and during the year ended December 31, 1995, no director or executive officer of
the  Company and no member  of the Compensation Committee  is, or was during the
year ended December 31, 1995, a director or compensation committee member of any
other business entity which had a director  that sits on the Company's Board  of
Directors or Compensation Committee.
 
                                       29
<PAGE>
                              CERTAIN TRANSACTIONS
 
    Deluxe owned 51.3% of the Company's outstanding Common Stock as of March 30,
1996 and two of its executive officers (Messrs. Osborne and Twogood) are members
of the Company's Board of Directors. From time to time over the last nine years,
the  Company  has had  agreements with  Deluxe to  develop or  deliver products,
supplies and services  to Deluxe.  Under some  of these  agreements the  Company
received  prepayments  as  a  source  of  financing  in  exchange  for providing
favorable pricing to  Deluxe. The Company  has recorded these  prepayments as  a
deferred  revenue  liability and  no revenue  was  recognized until  the Company
delivered the goods or services to Deluxe.
 
    In February 1991 Deluxe  ordered several units of  a film imager version  of
the  Model 3240  and associated  ZipRip raster  image processors  for a purchase
price and advance payment of $516,000. The Company offered favorable pricing  to
Deluxe due to the Company's desire to receive financing from the advance payment
and the need for Deluxe to wait for completion of the development and subsequent
production  of the units. A  change to the product  resulted in Deluxe paying an
additional $40,000 in  November 1991.  The Company  delivered a  portion of  the
Model  3240 film imagers in 1993. In  August 1994 Deluxe replaced its order with
another order for  the Platesetter version  of the Model  3240. The  replacement
order  was for a  number of Model  3240 Platesetters, ZAPrips  and a film imager
Model 3240, for  an increase  of $155,000 in  the aggregate  price. The  Company
delivered the products for the replacement order in 1995.
 
    In  August 1993 the Company  and Deluxe entered into  a contract that called
for the  Company to  provide  special equipment  to  Deluxe for  $1.59  million.
Approximately  $635,000 of  the contract  amount was paid  as a  down payment in
order to  allow  the  Company  to finance  the  procurement  of  components  and
assemblies  to ensure  their availability  for subsequent  equipment production.
Deluxe later determined not to proceed with the transaction and paid the Company
an additional $45,000.  As a result  of the contract  cancellation, the  Company
wrote  down the  related inventory.  The Company  had no  material gain  or loss
resulting from the contract cancellation and settlement.
 
    Effective in January  1995, the  Company entered  into a  three year  supply
contract  with  Deluxe to  supply  Deluxe with  Model  1440 plate  material. The
contract calls for Deluxe  to purchase a fixed  quantity of plate material  each
year.  In 1995 this contract produced revenues  to the Company of between $2 and
$3 million. The Company believes this contract will produce similar revenues for
the Company in 1996 and 1997.
 
    In February 1996, the Company entered  into an $80,000 contract with  Deluxe
under which the Company is performing software research and development work. In
April  1996 Deluxe placed a $102,000 purchase  order for the Company to retrofit
certain Deluxe equipment to  incorporate the results  of this software  research
and development work.
 
   
    The  Company believes that its agreements  and transactions with Deluxe have
been on terms (taking into account advance payments and delayed delivery  dates)
that are no less favorable to the Company than could have been obtained in arm's
length  transactions  with  an  unaffiliated party.  The  Company's  policy with
respect to future transactions with  affiliates is that where such  transactions
are  material,  approval will  be required  by a  majority of  the disinterested
members of the Company's board of directors.
    
 
                                       30
<PAGE>
                       PRINCIPAL AND SELLING SHAREHOLDERS
 
    The following  table sets  forth  certain information  regarding  beneficial
ownership  of the Company's Common Stock as of March 30, 1996 and as adjusted to
reflect the sale of the  shares offered hereby by (i)  each person known to  the
Company  to beneficially own more  than five percent (5%)  of Common Stock, (ii)
each director, (iii) each  of the Named Executive  Officers, (iv) all  directors
and  executive  officers  of  the  Company  as  a  group  and  (v)  each Selling
Shareholder. Except  as  otherwise indicated  below,  to the  knowledge  of  the
Company,  all shareholders have sole voting and investment power over the shares
beneficially owned, except to  the extent authority is  shared by spouses  under
applicable law.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                      SHARES BENEFICIALLY                   SHARES BENEFICIALLY
                                                        OWNED PRIOR TO                          OWNED AFTER
                                                           OFFERING           SHARES TO          OFFERING
                                                    -----------------------    BE SOLD    -----------------------
NAME                                                  NUMBER      PERCENT    IN OFFERING    NUMBER      PERCENT
- --------------------------------------------------  ----------  -----------  -----------  ----------  -----------
<S>                                                 <C>         <C>          <C>          <C>         <C>
Deluxe Corporation(1) ............................   1,862,290      51.31%      274,600    1,587,690      32.87%
 P.O. Box 64235
 St. Paul, MN 55164-0235
Donald V. Mager(2)(3) ............................     454,862      12.53%       62,300      392,562       8.13%
 c/o Printware, Inc.
 1270 Eagan Industrial Rd.
 St. Paul, MN 55121
Allen L. Taylor(3) ...............................     405,875      11.18%       62,300      343,575       7.11%
 c/o Printware, Inc.
 1270 Eagan Industrial Rd.
 St. Paul, MN 55121
Thomas W. Petschauer(4)...........................      99,823       2.75%            0       99,823       2.07%
Daniel A. Baker(5)................................      28,750          *             0       28,750          *
Joseph F. Dayton(6)...............................      25,800          *             0       25,800          *
Minnesota Technology, Inc.........................       5,500          *           800        4,700          *
Brian D. Shiffman.................................         500          *             0          500          *
Jerry K. Twogood(7)...............................   1,862,290      51.31%           **    1,587,690      32.87%
Charles M. Osborne(7).............................   1,862,290      51.31%           **    1,587,690      32.87%
Directors and executive officers as a group (8
 persons)(8)......................................   2,877,900      79.29%      399,200    2,478,700      51.32%
</TABLE>
    
 
- ---------------------------
 
 * Less than 1%
 
   
** Not applicable
    
 
(1)  Includes 5,000  shares issuable upon  the exercise  of warrants exercisable
    within 60 days of March 30, 1996. Deluxe is a major customer of the  Company
    and two of its officers are members of the Company's Board of Directors. See
    "Business-- Customers" and "Management."
 
(2)  Includes 18,700  shares issuable upon  the exercise  of options exercisable
    within 60 days of March 30, 1996.
 
(3) Mr. Mager and Mr. Taylor are members of the Company's Board of Directors.
 
(4) Includes 22,125  shares issuable  upon the exercise  of options  exercisable
    within 60 days of March 30, 1996. The shares listed above for Mr. Petschauer
    include  5,000  issued to  his wife,  as to  which Mr.  Petschauer disclaims
    beneficial ownership.
 
(5) Includes 18,750  shares issuable  upon the exercise  of options  exercisable
    within 60 days of March 30, 1996.
 
(6)  Includes 25,700  shares issuable upon  the exercise  of options exercisable
    within 60 days of March 30, 1996.
 
   
(7) Shares indicated for Messrs. Twogood and Osborne consist entirely of  shares
    owned by Deluxe, as to which Messrs. Twogood and Osborne disclaim beneficial
    ownership. They are officers of Deluxe and members of the Company's Board of
    Directors.
    
 
(8)  Includes 85,275  shares issuable upon  the exercise  of options exercisable
    within 60 days  of March  30, 1996,  the shares  owned by  Deluxe and  5,000
    shares  issuable to  Deluxe upon  the exercise  of its  warrants exercisable
    within 60 days of March 30, 1996.
 
                                       31
<PAGE>
                          DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
 
    The authorized capital stock of the Company consists of 15,000,000 shares of
Common Stock, no par value per  share, and 1,000,000 shares of Preferred  Stock.
The following summary of the terms and provisions of the Company's capital stock
does not purport to be complete and is qualified in its entirety by reference to
the Company's Articles of Incorporation and applicable law.
 
COMMON STOCK
 
    On  March 30, 1996, there were  3,629,713 shares of Common Stock outstanding
held by 209 shareholders of record. All shares of Common Stock have equal voting
rights and  have  one  vote per  share  in  all  matters to  be  voted  upon  by
shareholders.  Cumulative voting in the election of directors is not allowed. No
share of Common Stock is entitled to  preference over any other share of  Common
Stock,  and each  share of Common  Stock is equal  to any other  share of Common
Stock in all respects. All  of the outstanding shares  of Common Stock are,  and
the  shares  to  be sold  pursuant  to this  offering  will be,  fully  paid and
nonassessable.
 
    The shares  of Common  Stock have  no preemptive  or conversion  rights,  no
redemption  or sinking fund  provisions and are  not liable for  further call or
assessment. Subject to the rights of holders of the Preferred Stock, each  share
of  Common  Stock is  entitled to  receive a  return of  paid-in capital  and to
participate pro rata in any distribution of capital assets, whether voluntary or
involuntary, after creditors have been paid in full.
 
    Subject to the  rights of holders  of the Preferred  Stock, shareholders  of
Common  Stock are  entitled to  receive dividends  when and  as declared  by the
Company's Board of Directors  out of funds legally  available thereof. Any  such
dividends  may be paid in cash, property  or shares of Common Stock. The Company
has not paid any  cash dividends since its  inception and presently  anticipates
that  no  dividends on  its Common  Stock  will be  declared in  the foreseeable
future.
 
PREFERRED STOCK
 
    There are no shares of Preferred Stock issued and outstanding. The Preferred
Stock is issuable by  the Board of Directors  from time to time  in one or  more
series  without approval of the Company's  shareholders. Each series will have a
distinctive designation or  title as is  fixed by the  Board of Directors.  Each
series  of Preferred  Stock will  have such voting  power (or  no voting power),
preferences, rights, qualifications, limitations or restrictions as are  adopted
by  the Board of Directors prior to the issuance of the series, and would likely
have rights superior to the rights of Common Stock. The Company presently has no
plan to issue any Preferred Stock.
 
INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
 
    The Company's Bylaws and Minnesota law require the Company to indemnify  any
director, officer, employee or agent of the Company who was or is a party to any
threatened,  pending  or completed  action, suit  or proceeding,  whether civil,
criminal, administrative  or  investigative,  against  certain  liabilities  and
expenses  incurred in  connection with  the action,  suit or  proceeding, except
where such persons have not  acted in good faith  or did not reasonably  believe
that the conduct was in the best interests of the Company.
 
    Insofar  as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act
of 1933,  as amended  (the "Securities  Act"), may  be permitted  to  directors,
officers  or other  persons controlling  the Company  pursuant to  the foregoing
provisions,  the  opinion  of  the  Securities  and  Exchange  Commission   (the
"Commission") is that such indemnification is against public policy as expressed
in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.
 
ANTI-TAKEOVER PROVISIONS OF MINNESOTA BUSINESS CORPORATION ACT
 
    Certain   provisions  of  Minnesota  law   described  below  could  have  an
anti-takeover effect.  These  provisions  are  intended  to  provide  management
flexibility  to  enhance  the  likelihood of  continuity  and  stability  in the
composition of the Company's Board of  Directors and in the policies  formulated
by  the Board and to  discourage an unsolicited takeover  of the Company, if the
Board determines that such a takeover is not in
 
                                       32
<PAGE>
the  best  interests  of  the  Company  and  its  shareholders.  However,  these
provisions could have the effect of discouraging certain attempts to acquire the
Company  which could deprive the Company's shareholders of opportunities to sell
their shares of Common stock at prices higher than prevailing market prices.
 
    Section 302A.671 of the Minnesota Business Corporation Act ("MBCA") provides
that, unless the acquisition of certain new percentages of voting control of the
Company (in excess of 20%, 33 1/3%  or 50%) by an existing shareholder or  other
person  is  approved by  a  majority of  the  disinterested shareholders  of the
Company, the shares acquired above such  new percentage level of voting  control
will not be entitled to voting rights. The Company is required to hold a special
shareholders'  meeting to vote on any such  acquisition within 55 days after the
delivery to the Company by the acquiror of an information statement  describing,
among  other things, the acquiror and any  plans of the acquiror to liquidate or
dissolve the  Company and  copies  of definitive  financing agreements  for  any
financing of the acquisition not to be provided by funds of the acquiror. If any
acquiror does not submit an information statement to the Company within ten days
after acquiring shares representing a new threshold percentage of voting control
of the Company, or if the disinterested shareholders vote not to approve such an
acquisition,  the Company may redeem  the shares so acquired  by the acquiror at
their market value. Section 302A.671 generally does not apply to a cash offer to
purchase all shares of voting stock of the issuing corporation if such offer has
been approved by a majority vote  of disinterested board members of the  issuing
corporation.
 
    Section  302A.673  of the  MBCA restricts  certain transactions  between the
Company and a shareholder who  becomes the beneficial holder  of 10% or more  of
the  Company's outstanding voting  stock (an "interested  shareholder") unless a
majority of the disinterested directors of  the Company have approved, prior  to
the  date on which the shareholder acquired  a 10% interest, either the business
combination transaction suggested by  such a shareholder  or the acquisition  of
shares  that made such a shareholder a statutory interested shareholder. If such
prior approval is not obtained, the statute imposes a four-year prohibition from
the statutory interested shareholder's share acquisition date on mergers,  sales
of  substantial assets, loans, substantial issuances  of stock and various other
transactions involving the Company and  the statutory interested shareholder  or
its affiliates.
 
TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR
 
    The  Transfer Agent and Registrar  with respect to the  Common Stock will be
American Securities Transfer, Incorporated of Denver, Colorado.
 
                        SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
 
    Prior to this Offering, there has been no market for the Common Stock of the
Company. Sales of  substantial amounts  of Common Stock  of the  Company in  the
public  market after  restrictions lapse  could adversely  affect the prevailing
market price and  the ability  of the  Company to  raise equity  capital in  the
future.
 
    Upon the completion of this Offering, the Company will have 4,829,713 shares
of  Common  Stock outstanding,  assuming  no exercise  of  currently outstanding
options or warrants. Of these shares, the 1,600,000 shares sold in this Offering
will be freely tradeable  without restriction under  the Securities Act,  unless
held  by "affiliates" of the Company, as that  term is defined in Rule 144 under
the Securities  Act. The  remaining 3,229,713  shares of  Common stock  held  by
existing  stockholders  were  issued and  sold  by  the Company  in  reliance on
exemptions from  the  registration requirements  of  the Securities  Act.  These
shares  may be sold in  the public market only if  registered, or pursuant to an
exemption from registration such as Rule 144, 144(k) or 701 under the Securities
Act. Holders of an aggregate of 2,383,425 shares of Common Stock and holders  of
options and warrants to purchase an additional 119,606 shares, have entered into
lock-up  agreements under which they have agreed not to offer, sell or otherwise
dispose, or directly  or indirectly  cause or permit  the offer,  sale or  other
disposition,  of any Common Stock of the Company owned of record or beneficially
and of which such  shareholder has the  power to control  the disposition for  a
period  of  six months  after the  date  of this  Prospectus, without  the prior
written consent  of the  Underwriter. The  Company has  entered into  a  similar
agreement,  except that the Company may grant  options and issue stock under its
current stock option plans and pursuant to other currently outstanding options.
 
                                       33
<PAGE>
    As of March 30,  1996, 135,567 shares were  subject to outstanding  options.
Following this Offering, the Company intends to file a Registration Statement on
Form  S-8 covering  shares issuable under  the Company's  Incentive Stock Option
Plan adopted in 1985, 1986 Incentive Stock Option Plan, 1996 Stock Plan and 1996
Employee Stock Purchase Plan, thus permitting  the resale of such shares in  the
public  market without restrictions under the Securities Act after expiration of
the applicable lock-up agreements.
 
    Upon the effective date of the Offering, 748,876 shares of Common Stock will
become eligible for sale in the public market pursuant to Rule 144(k). Beginning
90 days after the  date of this Prospectus,  23,698 additional shares of  Common
Stock  (including  14,792 shares  subject  to outstanding  vested  options) will
become available for sale in the public market subject, in certain cases, to the
vesting requirements and volume and manner of sale limitations of Rule 144. Upon
expiration of the lock-up agreements,  an additional 2,473,700 shares of  Common
Stock   (including  66,575   shares  subject   to  outstanding   vested  options
and 5,000 shares subject  to outstanding vested  warrants) will become  eligible
for  immediate public  resale, subject in  some cases to  vesting provisions and
volume limitations pursuant to Rule 144. The remaining 4,700 shares will  become
eligible for public resale at various times over a period of less than two years
following  the completion  of this  Offering, subject  in some  cases to vesting
provisions and volume limitations.
 
    In general, under  Rule 144  as currently in  effect, a  person (or  persons
whose  shares are aggregated) who has beneficially owned shares for at least two
years (including the holding period of any prior owner, except an affiliate)  is
entitled  to sell  in "broker's  transactions" or  to market  makers, within any
three-month period  commencing 90  days after  the date  of this  Prospectus,  a
number  of shares  that does not  exceed the greater  of (i) one  percent of the
number of shares of Common  Stock then outstanding (approximately 48,297  shares
immediately  after this Offering)  or (ii) the average  weekly trading volume of
the Common Stock during the four calendar weeks preceding the required filing of
a Form 144 with respect to such sale. Sales under Rule 144 are generally subject
to certain  manner  of  sale  provisions and  notice  requirements  and  to  the
availability of current public information about the Company. Under Rule 144(k),
a  person who is not deemed to have been an affiliate of the Company at any time
during the 90 days preceding a sale,  and who has beneficially owned the  shares
proposed  to be sold for  at least three years, is  entitled to sell such shares
without having to  comply with the  manner of sale,  public information,  volume
limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144. Under Rule 701 under the Securities
Act,  persons who purchase shares upon exercise  of options granted prior to the
effective date of this Offering are entitled  to sell such shares 90 days  after
the  effective date of this Offering in  reliance on Rule 144, without having to
comply with the  holding period requirements  of Rule  144 and, in  the case  of
non-affiliates,  without having  to comply  with the  public information, volume
limitation or notice provisions of Rule 144.
 
    The Securities and  Exchange Commission has  recently proposed reducing  the
initial  Rule 144 holding period to one  year and the Rule 144(k) holding period
to two years. There can be no assurance as to when or whether such rule  changes
will be enacted. If enacted, such modification may have a material effect on the
time when shares of the Company's Common Stock become eligible for resale.
 
REGISTRATION RIGHTS
 
   
    In  connection with their  acquisition of securities of  the Company, two of
the Company's existing  shareholders, 3M  and Minnesota  Technology, Inc.,  have
agreements  with the  Company under which  these shareholders have  the right to
have a total of 109,961 shares of Common Stock owned by them included in  future
registration  statements  filed by  the Company  under  the Securities  Act. The
Company would bear most of the expense associated with including the  additional
shares in such a registration.
    
 
                                       34
<PAGE>
                                  UNDERWRITING
 
    Subject  to the  terms and  conditions of  the Underwriting  Agreement, each
Underwriter named below has  severally agreed to purchase,  and the Company  and
the Selling Stockholders have agreed to sell to such Underwriters, the number of
shares of Common Stock set forth opposite the name of such Underwriter below, at
the  Price to Public  set forth on the  cover page of  this Prospectus, less the
underwriting discount.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
UNDERWRITERS                                                                           NUMBER OF SHARES
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  ------------------
<S>                                                                                   <C>
R.J. Steichen & Company.............................................................
 
                                                                                           ----------
  Total.............................................................................        1,600,000
                                                                                           ----------
                                                                                           ----------
</TABLE>
 
    The Underwriting Agreement provides that the obligations of the Underwriters
are subject  to certain  conditions  precedent and  that the  Underwriters  will
purchase  all  of the  shares  of the  Common Stock  offered  hereby if  any are
purchased.
 
    The  Company  and  the  Selling  Shareholders  have  been  advised  by   the
Representative that the Underwriters propose to offer the shares of Common Stock
to  the  public at  the Price  to Public  set forth  on the  cover page  of this
Prospectus and to certain  selected dealers at such  Price to Public less  usual
and customary concessions not in excess of $     per share. The Underwriters may
allow,  and such  dealers may reallow,  a concession  not in excess  of $.05 per
share to certain other securities dealers. Each of the concessions allowed  will
be  to members of the National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. After the
initial public  offering, the  offering price  and other  selling terms  may  be
changed by the Underwriters.
 
    The Company and the Selling Shareholders have granted to the Underwriters an
option, exercisable not later than 30 days after the date of this Prospectus, to
purchase  up to an additional  180,000 shares of Common  Stock from the Company,
and up to  an additional  60,000 shares from  the Selling  Shareholders, at  the
Price  to Public less the  underwriting discount set forth  on the cover page of
this Prospectus.  The  Underwriters  may  exercise such  option  only  to  cover
over-allotments made in connection with the sale of Common Stock offered hereby.
If  purchased, the  Underwriters will offer  such additional shares  on the same
terms as those on which the 1,600,000 shares are being offered.
 
    The Company and the Selling Shareholders have  agreed to pay, on a pro  rata
basis, to the Representative a nonaccountable expense allowance equal to 2.0% of
the  aggregate offering price of the shares offered hereby, including the shares
sold by the Selling Shareholders,  or $        ($         if the  over-allotment
option  is exercised in full), of which $10,000 has been paid. Such allowance is
included in the expenses  of the Offering  set forth on the  cover page of  this
Prospectus.
 
    The  Company has agreed  to sell to  the Representative upon  the closing of
this Offering,  for  nominal  consideration,  the  Representative's  Warrant  to
purchase  120,000 shares of Common Stock at an exercise price per share equal to
120% of the Price to Public. The Representative's Warrant contains anti-dilution
provisions providing for appropriate adjustments upon the occurrence of  certain
events  and  contains a  one-time  demand and  certain  "piggyback" registration
rights with respect to the shares of Common Stock issuable upon the exercise  of
the Representative's Warrant. The Representative's Warrant will have a "cashless
exercise"  feature entitling the holder  to convert the Representative's Warrant
into  shares  of  Common  Stock.  This  provision  allows  the  holder  of   the
Representative's Warrant to apply the difference
 
                                       35
<PAGE>
between  the exercise price of the  Representative's Warrant and the higher fair
market value of the Common Stock underlying the Representative's Warrant to  the
payment  of the exercise price. The Representative's Warrant will be exercisable
commencing one year from the date of this Prospectus until five years after such
date. The Representative's Warrant is not transferable for a period of one  year
after  the effective date of the Offering,  except for transfers by operation of
law, by will or pursuant to the laws of descent and distribution or to  officers
of  the Representative.  Furthermore, the  Representative's Warrant  will not be
transferable absent an  exemption from applicable  state and federal  securities
laws.  Any profits realized upon the sale of the Representative's Warrant or the
Common Stock  issuable  upon  exercise  thereof  may  be  deemed  to  constitute
additional underwriting compensation.
 
   
    The  Company, the Selling  Shareholders and the  Underwriters have agreed in
the Underwriting Agreement to indemnify each other or provide contribution  with
respect  to certain liabilities, including  liabilities under the Securities Act
and  liabilities  arising  from  breaches  of  representations  and   warranties
contained  in  the Underwriting  Agreement. Such  indemnification is  limited or
unavailable in certain circumstances, including where legally unavailable.
    
 
    Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities  Act
may  be permitted to directors, officers  and controlling persons of the Company
pursuant to the foregoing provisions or otherwise, the Company has been  advised
that   in  the   opinion  of  the   Securities  and   Exchange  Commission  such
indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act, and
is, therefore, unenforceable.
 
    Shareholders of the  Company holding  in the aggregate  2,383,425 shares  of
Common  Stock  and holders  of options  and warrants  to purchase  an additional
119,606 shares have agreed not to offer, sell or otherwise dispose, or  directly
or  indirectly cause  or permit  the offer,  sale or  other disposition,  of any
Common Stock of the Company  owned of record or  beneficially and of which  such
shareholder  has the power to control the disposition for a period of six months
after  the  date  of   this  Prospectus  without  the   prior  consent  of   the
Representative. See "Shares Eligible for Future Sale."
 
    The Underwriters have advised the Company that they do not intend to confirm
sales to any account over which any of them exercises discretionary authority.
 
    Prior to this Offering, there has been no public market for the Common Stock
of  the Company. Consequently, the initial  public offering price for the Common
Stock  will  be  determined   by  negotiation  between   the  Company  and   the
Representative.  Among  the  factors  considered in  such  negotiations  will be
prevailing market conditions, the results of operations of the Company in recent
periods, the market capitalizations and stages of development of other companies
which the  Company  and the  Representative  believe  to be  comparable  to  the
Company,  estimates of the business potential  of the Company, the present state
of the Company's development and other factors deemed relevant.
 
                                    EXPERTS
 
    The financial statements of the Company as of December 31, 1995 and 1994 and
for each of the three  years in the period ended  December 31, 1995 included  in
this  Prospectus  have  been  audited  by  Deloitte  &  Touche  LLP, independent
auditors, as stated in their report appearing herein, and have been so  included
in  reliance upon the report of such  firm given upon their authority as experts
in accounting and auditing.
 
                                 LEGAL MATTERS
 
    The validity of the Common Stock offered hereby will be passed upon for  the
Company  by Lindquist &  Vennum P.L.L.P., Minneapolis,  Minnesota. Certain legal
matters relating to  the Offering will  be passed upon  for the Underwriters  by
Winthrop & Weinstine, P.A., Minneapolis, Minnesota.
 
                                       36
<PAGE>
                             ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
 
    The  Company has filed with the  Commission a Registration Statement on Form
S-1 under the Securities  Act with respect to  the Common Stock offered  hereby.
This  Prospectus  does not  contain  all of  the  information set  forth  in the
Registration Statement and  the exhibits thereto.  For further information  with
respect  to  the  Company  and  the Common  Stock,  reference  is  made  to such
Registration Statement and exhibits.  Statements made in  this Prospectus as  to
the  contents of any contract, agreement or  other documents referred to are not
necessarily complete. With  respect to  each such contract,  agreement or  other
document filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement, reference is made to
the  exhibit  for  a  more  complete description  of  the  matter  involved. The
Registration Statement and exhibits may  be inspected without charge and  copied
at  the public  reference facilities maintained  by the Commission  at 450 Fifth
Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20549;  Citicorp Center, 500 West Madison,  Suite
1400,  Chicago, Illinois  60661; and  7 World Trade  Center, New  York, New York
10048. Copies of  such material  may be obtained  at prescribed  rates from  the
Commission's  Public Reference  Section at  450 Fifth  Street, N.W., Washington,
D.C. 20549.
 
                                       37
<PAGE>
                         INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                        PAGE
                                                                        ----
 
<S>                                                                     <C>
Independent Auditors' Report..........................................  F-2
 
Balance Sheets as of March 30, 1996 (unaudited) and December 31, 1995
 and 1994.............................................................  F-3
 
Statements of Operations for the three months ended March 30, 1996 and
 April 1, 1995 (unaudited) and the years ended December 31, 1995, 1994
 and 1993.............................................................  F-4
 
Statements of Changes in Shareholders' Equity for the three months
 ended March 30, 1996 (unaudited) and the years ended December 31,
 1995, 1994 and 1993..................................................  F-5
 
Statements of Cash Flows for the three months ended March 30, 1996 and
 April 1, 1995 (unaudited) and the years ended December 31, 1995, 1994
 and 1993.............................................................  F-6
 
Notes to Financial Statements for the three months ended March 30,
 1996 and April 1, 1995 (unaudited) and the years ended December 31,
 1995, 1994 and 1993..................................................  F-7
</TABLE>
 
                                      F-1
<PAGE>
                          INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT
 
To The Shareholders of Printware, Inc.:
 
    We  have audited  the accompanying  balance sheets  of Printware,  Inc. (the
Company) as  of  December  31, 1995  and  1994  and the  related  statements  of
operations,  shareholders' equity and cash flows for  each of the three years in
the  period  ended  December  31,  1995.  These  financial  statements  are  the
responsibility  of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an
opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
 
    We conducted  our  audits in  accordance  with generally  accepted  auditing
standards.  Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence  supporting
the  amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the  accounting  principles used  and  significant estimates  made  by
management,  as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
 
    In our opinion, such  financial statements present  fairly, in all  material
respects,  the financial  position of Printware,  Inc. at December  31, 1995 and
1994 and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the  three
years  in  the period  ended  December 31,  1995,  in conformity  with generally
accepted accounting principles.
 
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
 
Minneapolis, Minnesota
February 2, 1996
(April 25, 1996 as to the
first paragraph of Note 3)
 
                                      F-2
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
 
                                 BALANCE SHEETS
 
                                     ASSETS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                   DECEMBER 31,
                                                                            --------------------------
                                                                                1995          1994
                                                               MARCH 30,    ------------  ------------
                                                                  1996
                                                              ------------
                                                              (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                           <C>           <C>           <C>
CURRENT ASSETS:
  Cash and cash equivalents.................................  $  2,795,856  $  2,568,852  $    860,668
  Receivables from non affiliates (Note 2)..................       441,384       511,085       276,290
  Receivables from affiliates (Note 10).....................       301,710       262,655       231,652
  Inventories (Notes 1 and 2)...............................     1,624,238     1,727,342     1,843,698
  Prepaid expenses..........................................        69,193        17,394        43,651
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
    Total current assets....................................     5,232,381     5,087,328     3,255,959
PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT, net of accumulated depreciation and
 amortization (Notes 1 and 2)...............................       130,419       130,677       183,415
INTANGIBLE ASSETS, net of accumulated amortization (Notes 1
 and 2).....................................................        33,606        34,396        37,554
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
                                                              $  5,396,406  $  5,252,401  $  3,476,928
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
 
                                 LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
 
CURRENT LIABILITIES:
  Accounts payable..........................................  $    390,602  $    436,852  $    445,059
  Accrued expenses (Notes 1 and 2)..........................       308,650       469,108       342,988
  Deferred revenues (Note 7)................................        41,488        29,773       175,350
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
    Total current liabilities...............................       740,740       935,733       963,397
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (Notes 4, 5, 7 and 11)
SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY (Note 3):
  Preferred Stock, no specified par value; 1,000,000 shares
   authorized; none issued and outstanding..................       --            --            --
  Common Stock, no par value, authorized 15,000,000 shares:
   issued and outstanding 3,629,713 shares at March 30,
   1996; 3,627,013 and 3,623,776 shares at December 31, 1995
   and 1994, respectively...................................    15,522,238    15,514,138    15,504,426
  Accumulated deficit.......................................   (10,866,572)  (11,197,470)  (12,990,895)
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
    Total shareholders' equity..............................     4,655,666     4,316,668     2,513,531
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
                                                              $  5,396,406  $  5,252,401  $  3,476,928
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
                                                              ------------  ------------  ------------
</TABLE>
    
 
                       See notes to financial statements.
 
                                      F-3
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
 
                            STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                                              ----------------------        YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                                              MARCH 30,    APRIL 1,   -----------------------------------
                                                                 1996        1995        1995        1994        1993
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
                                                                   (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                           <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>         <C>
REVENUES FROM NON AFFILIATES (Note 1, 7, and 8).............  $1,125,959  $1,005,934  $4,889,761  $3,775,958  $ 4,348,484
REVENUES FROM AFFILIATES (Note 10)..........................     706,054     801,689   3,498,387   2,850,967    2,948,000
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
TOTAL REVENUES..............................................   1,832,013   1,807,623   8,388,148   6,626,925    7,296,484
COST OF REVENUES............................................   1,110,046   1,000,871   5,003,956   4,102,401    5,344,519
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
Gross margin................................................     721,967     806,752   3,384,192   2,524,524    1,951,965
PERIOD COSTS:
  Research and development..................................     178,941     205,778     757,131     956,807    1,314,355
  Selling, general and administrative.......................     238,471     270,869   1,072,878     945,533    1,851,507
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
    Total...................................................     417,412     476,647   1,830,009   1,902,340    3,165,862
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
INCOME (LOSS) FROM OPERATIONS...............................     304,555     330,105   1,554,183     622,184   (1,213,897)
OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE):
  Net gain on arbitration award (Note 11)...................      --          --         192,335      --          --
  Interest expense..........................................        (235)     (1,250)     (3,333)     (4,457)      (8,143)
  Interest and other income.................................      33,078       9,628      72,740      27,375       18,442
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
INCOME (LOSS) BEFORE INCOME TAXES AND EXTRAORDINARY ITEM....     337,398     338,483   1,815,925     645,102   (1,203,598)
INCOME TAXES (Note 9).......................................       6,500      12,000      22,500       2,000        1,109
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
INCOME (LOSS) BEFORE EXTRAORDINARY ITEM.....................     330,898     326,483   1,793,425     643,102   (1,204,707)
EXTRAORDINARY ITEM -- GAIN ON EXTINGUISHMENT OF DEBT (Note
 3).........................................................      --          --          --         140,927      --
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
NET INCOME (LOSS)...........................................  $  330,898  $  326,483  $1,793,425  $  784,029  $(1,204,707)
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
NET INCOME (LOSS) PER COMMON AND COMMON EQUIVALENT SHARE
 (Note 1):
  Income (loss) before extraordinary item...................  $      .09  $      .09  $      .48  $      .17  $      (.33)
  Extraordinary item........................................      --          --          --             .04      --
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
  Net income (loss).........................................  $      .09  $      .09  $      .48  $      .21  $      (.33)
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
WEIGHTED AVERAGE NUMBER OF COMMON AND COMMON EQUIVALENT
 SHARES OUTSTANDING (Note 1)................................   3,705,403   3,705,627   3,705,627   3,685,580    3,635,226
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ----------  ----------  ----------  -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
                       See notes to financial statements.
 
                                      F-4
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
                       STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
 
                 THREE MONTHS ENDED MARCH 30, 1996 (UNAUDITED)
                AND YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                              COMMON STOCK                             TOTAL
                                                        -------------------------   ACCUMULATED    SHAREHOLDERS'
                                                          SHARES       AMOUNT         DEFICIT         EQUITY
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
<S>                                                     <C>         <C>            <C>             <C>
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 1992..........................   3,611,889  $  15,468,763  $  (12,570,217)  $ 2,898,546
Shares issued pursuant to exercise of stock options...         750          2,250        --               2,250
Shares redeemed and retired at $3.00 per share........        (700)        (2,100)       --              (2,100)
Shares issued for services performed for the
 Company..............................................       3,387         10,163        --              10,163
Net loss..............................................      --           --            (1,204,707)   (1,204,707)
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 1993..........................   3,615,326     15,479,076     (13,774,924)    1,704,152
Shares issued in connection with extinguishment of
 debt.................................................       5,500         16,500        --              16,500
Shares issued pursuant to exercise of stock options...         150            450        --                 450
Shares issued for services performed for the
 Company..............................................       2,800          8,400        --               8,400
Net income............................................      --           --               784,029       784,029
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 1994..........................   3,623,776     15,504,426     (12,990,895)    2,513,531
Shares issued pursuant to exercise of stock options...         737          2,212        --               2,212
Shares issued for services performed for the
 Company..............................................       2,500          7,500        --               7,500
Net income............................................      --           --             1,793,425     1,793,425
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
BALANCE AT DECEMBER 31, 1995..........................   3,627,013     15,514,138     (11,197,470)    4,316,668
Shares issued pursuant to exercise of stock options
 (unaudited)..........................................         200            600        --                 600
Shares issued for services performed for the Company
 (unaudited)..........................................       2,500          7,500        --               7,500
Net income (unaudited)................................      --           --               330,898       330,898
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
BALANCE AT MARCH 30, 1996 (UNAUDITED).................   3,629,713  $  15,522,238  $  (10,866,572)  $ 4,655,666
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
                                                        ----------  -------------  --------------  -------------
</TABLE>
 
                       See notes to financial statements.
 
                                      F-5
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
 
                            STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                               THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                                              ---------------------        YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31,
                                                              MARCH 30,   APRIL 1,   ------------------------------------
                                                                 1996       1995        1995        1994         1993
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
                                                                   (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                           <C>         <C>        <C>         <C>          <C>
OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
  Net income (loss).........................................  $  330,898  $ 326,483  $1,793,425  $   784,029  $(1,204,707)
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash
 provided by (used in) operating activities:
  Depreciation and amortization.............................      16,097     20,432      71,271       92,813      190,217
  Common Stock issued for services..........................       7,500      7,500       7,500        8,400       10,163
  Extraordinary item........................................      --         --          --         (140,927)     --
  Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
    Receivables from non affiliates.........................      69,701   (156,636)   (234,795)      98,149      535,864
    Receivables from affiliates.............................     (39,055)    (9,524)    (31,003)     (31,652)     160,573
    Inventories.............................................     103,104   (273,018)    116,356      636,099      405,332
    Prepaid expenses........................................     (51,799)    (3,612)     26,257      (15,559)      80,542
    Accounts payable........................................     (46,250)   106,558      (8,207)    (479,317)      56,946
    Accrued expenses........................................    (160,458)   (96,089)    126,120     (227,093)     221,916
    Deferred revenues.......................................      11,715   (153,050)   (145,577)  (1,102,361)    (387,064)
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
      Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities...     241,453   (230,956)  1,721,347     (377,419)      69,782
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
  Purchases of property and equipment.......................     (15,049)    (4,457)    (15,375)     (50,200)     (72,771)
  Increase in intangible assets.............................      --         --          --             (984)     (25,707)
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
      Net cash used in investing activities.................     (15,049)    (4,457)    (15,375)     (51,184)     (98,478)
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
  Advances on equipment and consumable sales................      --         --          --          --           755,712
  Proceeds from issuance of Common Stock....................         600      1,012       2,212          450        2,250
  Common Stock redeemed and retired.........................      --         --          --          --            (2,100)
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
      Net cash provided by financing activities.............         600      1,012       2,212          450      755,862
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
NET INCREASE (DECREASE) IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS........     227,004   (234,401)  1,708,184     (428,153)     727,166
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, BEGINNING OF PERIOD..............   2,568,852    860,668     860,668    1,288,821      561,655
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF PERIOD....................  $2,795,856  $ 626,267  $2,568,852  $   860,668  $ 1,288,821
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
SUPPLEMENTAL CASH FLOW DISCLOSURE:
  Cash paid during the period for:
    Interest................................................  $      236  $   1,250  $    3,333  $     4,457  $     8,143
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
    Income taxes............................................  $    6,500  $  12,000  $   15,488  $     2,000  $     1,109
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
OTHER NON CASH ITEM:
  Issuance of Common Stock for extinguishment of debt (Note
   3).......................................................      --         --          --      $    16,500      --
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
                                                              ----------  ---------  ----------  -----------  -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
                       See notes to financial statements.
 
                                      F-6
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                        DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993
 
1.  SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES
 
    NATURE OF BUSINESS
 
    Printware,  Inc. ("Printware" or the  "Company") designs, builds and markets
"Computer-to-Plate" systems that  are used  by the offset  printing industry  to
create  printing plates directly  from computer data.  These systems replace the
traditional process of typesetting, paste-up, camera work and processing film to
produce a printing plate.
 
    INTERIM FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
    The accompanying balance sheet  as of March 30,  1996 and the statements  of
operations and cash flows for the three months ended March 30, 1996 and April 1,
1995, the statement of shareholders' equity for the three months ended March 30,
1996  and the interim information as of and for the three months ended March 30,
1996 and  April 1,  1995 appearing  in  the notes  to financial  statements  are
unaudited.  In the  opinion of  management, such  unaudited financial statements
include  all  adjustments,  consisting  of  only  normal,  recurring   accruals,
necessary  for a  fair presentation thereof.  The results of  operations for any
interim period are not necessarily indicative of the results for the year.
 
    REVENUE RECOGNITION
 
    Revenue for equipment and supply sales is recognized at the time of shipment
to customers.  Revenue from  development  projects and  their related  costs  is
recognized  as the work is performed.  Revenue related to installation, training
and support  is  recognized  when  the  services  are  performed.  Revenue  from
development  projects, installation,  training and support  is less  than 10% of
total revenues for the three months ended  March 30, 1996 and April 1, 1995  and
the years ended December 31, 1995, 1994 and 1993.
 
    NET INCOME (LOSS) PER COMMON AND COMMON EQUIVALENT SHARE
 
    Net  income (loss)  per common  and common  equivalent share  is computed by
dividing net income (loss)  by the weighted average  number of shares of  Common
Stock  and  dilutive Common  Stock equivalents  outstanding. The  total weighted
average number  of common  and  common equivalent  shares outstanding  has  been
adjusted  to give effect to the reverse  stock split authorized by the Company's
shareholders effective April 25, 1996 (Note 3). Common Stock equivalents  result
from  dilutive  stock options  and warrants.  Common  equivalent shares  are not
included in the per share calculations when the effect of their inclusion  would
be  antidilutive,  except  that,  in  accordance  with  Securities  and Exchange
Commission requirements, common and common  equivalent shares issued during  the
12  months prior  to the  Company's proposed  initial public  offering have been
included in the calculation (using the treasury stock method based on an assumed
initial public offering price  of $6.50 per share)  as if they were  outstanding
for all periods presented. The net income (loss) per common share will change if
the actual initial public offering price differs from the assumed initial public
offering  price per share  utilized in this  calculation. Fully diluted earnings
(loss) per  common share  is substantially  equivalent to  primary earnings  per
share and is therefore not separately presented.
 
    CASH EQUIVALENTS
 
    Cash  equivalents consist primarily  of investments in  commercial paper and
certificate of deposits, which have original maturities of three months or less.
 
    CREDIT RISK
 
    The Company generally  does not  require collateral for  its trade  accounts
receivable.  The  Company  manages credit  risk  by  evaluating creditworthiness
regularly. Accounts  receivable  for which  collectibility  is not  assured  are
reserved  for  through  establishment  of an  allowance  for  doubtful accounts.
Customer accounts considered by management to be uncollectible are written off.
 
                                      F-7
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
1.  SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
    INVENTORIES
 
    Inventories are  valued at  the lower  of cost  (determined on  a  first-in,
first-out  basis)  or  market.  The  Company  has  recorded  inventory valuation
reserves of $562,000 at March 30, 1996 and $545,000 and $516,000 at December 31,
1995 and 1994, respectively.
 
    Inventories are  periodically reviewed  for obsolescence  or surplus  stock.
Items  considered obsolete or surplus are written  off or a valuation reserve is
established to write such inventories down to their net realizable value.
 
    The Company is  dependent on several  key suppliers for  plate material  and
raster  image processing  software. All of  the Company's  agreements with these
suppliers can be canceled by either party under certain circumstances.
 
    PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT
 
    Property and equipment  are recorded  at cost.  Office equipment,  software,
machinery  and equipment  and tooling are  depreciated on  a straight-line basis
over five years. Motor  vehicles are depreciated on  a straight-line basis  over
three  years. Leasehold improvements are amortized on a straight-line basis over
the term of the lease.
 
    IMPAIRMENT OF LONG-LIVED ASSETS
 
    Management periodically reviews the carrying  value of long-term assets  for
potential  impairment by  comparing the  carrying value  of these  assets to the
estimated undiscounted future  cash flows  expected to  result from  the use  of
these  assets. Should the sum of the  related, expected future net cash flows be
less than  the  carrying value,  an  impairment  loss would  be  recognized.  An
impairment  loss would be measured by the  amount by which the carrying value of
the asset  exceeds  the  fair  value  of the  asset.  To  date,  management  has
determined that no impairment of these assets exists.
 
    INTANGIBLE ASSETS
 
    Intangible  assets  are  recorded  at  cost and  are  being  amortized  on a
straight-line basis over the following lives:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                   YEARS
                                                                   -----
<S>                                                                <C>
Patents..........................................................    17
License rights...................................................   2-5
</TABLE>
 
    RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT EXPENDITURES
 
    Research and development expenditures are charged to expense as incurred.
 
    ACCOUNTING FOR WARRANTY COSTS
 
    The Company records estimated  future warranty costs  when the equipment  is
shipped to customers.
 
    MANAGEMENT ESTIMATES
 
    The  preparation  of  financial  statements  in  conformity  with  generally
accepted  accounting  principles  requires  management  to  make  estimates  and
assumptions  that  affect the  reported amounts  of  assets and  liabilities and
disclosure of contingent  assets and liabilities  at the date  of the  financial
statements  and  the  reported  amounts  of  revenues  and  expenses  during the
reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
                                      F-8
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
1.  SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED)
    FINANCIAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES
 
    In accordance  with  American  Institute  of  Certified  Public  Accountants
Statement  of Position  No. 94-6,  DISCLOSURE OF  CERTAIN SIGNIFICANT  RISKS AND
UNCERTAINTIES, the Company  has disclosed  in the  financial statements  certain
financial   risks  and   uncertainties  to   which  it   is  subject,  including
concentration of sales to  a limited number of  customers, certain suppliers  of
raw  materials and other  key components included  in its manufactured equipment
and the use of estimates to review the carrying value of long-lived assets.  The
nature  of  the Company's  operations exposes  the  Company to  certain business
risks. The  market for  "Computer-to-Plate" systems  is highly  competitive  and
subject  to rapid technological change and  evolving industry standards that may
affect both the  operations, operating  results and financial  condition of  the
Company and its customers.
 
    RECENTLY ISSUED ACCOUNTING STANDARDS
 
    In  October, 1995, the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement
of  Financial  Accounting   Standards  No.  123,   ACCOUNTING  FOR   STOCK-BASED
COMPENSATION  (SFAS 123). SFAS 123  requires expanded disclosures of stock-based
compensation arrangements with employees and  encourages (but does not  require)
application  of  the  fair value  recognition  provisions  of SFAS  123  to such
arrangements. SFAS 123 is required to  be adopted for reporting purposes by  the
Company  in 1996.  Companies are  permitted, however,  to continue  to apply APB
opinion No. 25, which recognizes compensation cost based on the intrinsic  value
of the equity instrument awarded. The Company will continue to apply APB opinion
No. 25 to its stock based compensation awards to employees and will disclose the
required pro forma effect on net income and earnings per share.
 
                                      F-9
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
2.  DETAILS OF SELECTED BALANCE SHEET ACCOUNTS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                DECEMBER 31,
                                               MARCH 30,   ----------------------
                                                  1996        1995        1994
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
<S>                                            <C>         <C>         <C>
RECEIVABLES FROM NON AFFILIATES:
  Trade......................................  $  463,855  $  532,883  $  296,811
  Employees..................................       2,442       3,115       1,017
  Allowance for doubtful accounts............     (24,913)    (24,913)    (21,538)
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Total receivables from non affiliates....  $  441,384  $  511,085  $  276,290
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
INVENTORIES:
  Raw materials..............................  $  687,200  $  782,189  $  860,885
  Work-in-process............................     153,292     165,246     109,701
  Finished goods.............................     783,746     779,907     873,112
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Total inventories........................  $1,624,238  $1,727,342  $1,843,698
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT:
  Office equipment...........................  $  400,061  $  395,650  $  386,697
  Software...................................      98,685      94,547      94,154
  Machinery and equipment....................     232,406     225,906     219,876
  Leasehold improvements.....................      74,762      74,762      74,763
  Tooling and spares.........................     334,001     334,001     334,001
  Motor vehicles.............................      10,063      10,063      10,063
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Total property and equipment.............   1,149,978   1,134,919   1,119,554
  Less accumulated depreciation and
   amortization..............................   1,019,559   1,004,252     936,139
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Net property and equipment...............  $  130,419  $  130,677  $  183,415
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
INTANGIBLE ASSETS:
  License rights.............................  $  560,020  $  560,020  $  560,020
  Patents....................................      53,701      53,701      53,701
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Total intangible assets..................     613,721     613,721     613,721
  Less accumulated amortization..............     580,115     579,325     576,167
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Net intangible assets....................  $   33,606  $   34,396  $   37,554
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
ACCRUED EXPENSES:
  Accrued payroll and related................  $   50,560  $   77,339  $   75,932
  Accrued vacation and benefits..............     127,927     126,479     102,750
  Accrued professional services..............      77,844     204,175      97,175
  Accrued warranty reserve...................      31,965      33,038      29,310
  Accrued income taxes.......................      --           7,012      --
  Accrued other..............................      20,354      21,065      37,821
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
    Total accrued expenses...................  $  308,650  $  469,108  $  342,988
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
                                               ----------  ----------  ----------
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      F-10
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
3.  SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
    On  April  25,  1996,  the Company's  shareholders  approved  a one-for-four
reverse stock  split, effective  immediately. All  references in  the  financial
statements  to the number of  shares, per share amounts,  stock option plan data
and the statements  of shareholders' equity  have been restated  to reflect  the
split. On April 25, 1996 the Company's shareholders approved an amendment to the
Company's Articles of Incorporation, whereby the authorized stock of the Company
was  stated as  15,000,000 shares  of Common Stock,  no par  value and 1,000,000
shares of  Preferred Stock,  no  specified par  value.  The Company's  Board  of
Directors  may designate any series and  fix any relative rights and preferences
of the  Preferred  Stock.  The  authorized shares  have  been  restated  in  the
financial  statements  to reflect  the impact  of this  amendment. No  shares of
Preferred Stock are issued and outstanding.
 
    During the three months  ended March 30, 1996  and the years ended  December
31, 1995, 1994 and 1993, certain employees exercised their options and purchased
a  total of 200, 737, 150 and 750 shares of Common Stock, respectively, at $3.00
per share.
 
    The Company also issued 2,500, 2,500, 2,800 and 3,387 shares of Common Stock
valued at  $7,500, $7,500,  $8,400  and $10,163  in consideration  for  services
rendered  during  the three  months ended  March  30, 1996  and the  years ended
December 31, 1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.
 
    During 1994, the Company extinguished debt of $157,427 through the  issuance
of  5,500 shares of the Company's Common  Stock valued at $16,500 which resulted
in an extraordinary gain  of $140,927. The repurchase  of the debt canceled  the
Company's obligation under a research agreement with a governmental agency.
 
    Common  Stock values were based on  management's estimates of the fair value
of the Company's Common Stock.
 
    STOCK OPTIONS
 
    On April 25,  1996 the Company's  shareholders approved a  new stock  option
plan  (the  1996 Stock  Plan) which  provides  for the  granting of  options and
restricted stock to  certain officers, employees,  directors and consultants  to
purchase  up to 500,000 shares  of Common Stock. On  April 25, 1996, the Company
granted options to purchase 900 shares of the Company's Common Stock under  this
plan  to certain employees. The options become  exercisable 33 1/3% per year for
three years. The exercise price is $3.00 per share. The options expire six years
after the date of  grant. The 1996  Stock Plan also  provides for the  automatic
grant  of an option for 1,000 shares  of the Company's Common Stock, exercisable
for a period of five years, to each non-employee director, upon the adoption  of
the  1996 Stock  Plan and upon  the election or  re-election as a  member of the
Board of  Directors. Such  Board of  Directors options  will be  issued with  an
exercise  price equal to the  fair market value of the  Common Stock on the date
the option is granted. On  April 25, 1996, options  to purchase 2,000 shares  of
Common  Stock were granted under  this plan with an  exercise price of $3.00 per
share.
 
    The Company's prior incentive stock option plans provided that stock options
to purchase an aggregate  of 375,000 shares  of Common Stock  may be granted  to
certain  officers and employees. The exercise price  could not be less than 100%
of the fair market value of the Common Stock on the date the option was granted.
No additional options under the Company's prior plans will be granted.
 
    All options  issued  after  August  1992  and  before  March  30,  1996  are
exercisable  33 1/3% per year for three years  or 100% one year after grant. All
of these options expire either five, six or ten years from the date of grant.
 
                                      F-11
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
3.  SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY (CONTINUED)
    Stock option activity is summarized as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                          AGGREGATE
                                               NUMBER OF    PRICE PER     EXERCISE
EMPLOYEE STOCK OPTIONS                          SHARES        SHARE         PRICE
- ---------------------------------------------  ---------   ------------   ---------
<S>                                            <C>         <C>            <C>
Balance at December 31, 1992.................   116,028       $3.00       $ 348,084
  Granted....................................     3,175        3.00           9,525
  Canceled...................................   (23,293)       3.00         (69,879)
  Exercised..................................      (750)       3.00          (2,250)
                                               ---------                  ---------
Balance at December 31, 1993.................    95,160        3.00         285,480
  Granted....................................     1,912        3.00           5,736
  Canceled...................................   (14,516)       3.00         (43,548)
  Exercised..................................      (150)       3.00            (450)
                                               ---------                  ---------
Balance at December 31, 1994.................    82,406        3.00         247,218
  Granted....................................    23,087        3.00          69,261
  Canceled...................................    (1,784)       3.00          (5,352)
  Exercised..................................      (737)       3.00          (2,211)
                                               ---------                  ---------
Balance at December 31, 1995.................   102,972        3.00         308,916
  Granted....................................    33,382        3.00         100,146
  Canceled...................................      (587)       3.00          (1,761)
  Exercised..................................      (200)       3.00            (600)
                                               ---------                  ---------
Balance at March 30, 1996....................   135,567       $3.00       $ 406,701
                                               ---------                  ---------
                                               ---------                  ---------
</TABLE>
 
    At March  30, 1996  and December  31, 1995,  there were  100,067 and  79,548
options exercisable at $3.00 per share, respectively.
 
    WARRANTS
 
    Warrant activity is summarized as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                           AGGREGATE
                                               NUMBER OF     PRICE PER     EXERCISE
                                                SHARES         SHARE         PRICE
                                               ---------   -------------  -----------
<S>                                            <C>         <C>            <C>
Balance at December 31, 1993.................   530,069    $3.00 - 12.00  $ 5,515,119
Canceled.....................................  (525,069)    9.22 - 12.00   (5,500,119)
                                               ---------                  -----------
Balance at December 31, 1994 and 1995 and
 March 30, 1996..............................     5,000        $3.00      $    15,000
                                               ---------                  -----------
                                               ---------                  -----------
</TABLE>
 
    All outstanding warrants expire on August 28, 1997.
 
    RESTRICTED STOCK
 
    The  Company has entered  into a restricted stock  compensation plan with an
officer of  the  Company  under  which  the  Company  issued  10,000  shares  of
restricted  stock to  the officer  over a  four year  period, provided  that the
officer remained an employee of  the Company as of  the anniversary date of  the
plan.  Under this plan the  last 2,500 shares were issued  as of March 30, 1996.
Compensation expense  related  to  these restricted  stock  issuances  has  been
recorded in the statements of operations.
 
                                      F-12
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
3.  SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY (CONTINUED)
    1996 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN
 
    The  Company's 1996 Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the "Stock Purchase Plan")
was adopted on April  25, 1996 and  provides for the issuance  of up to  100,000
shares  of Common Stock.  With certain exceptions, all  employees of the Company
who have  been employed  by the  Company for  at least  six months  and who  are
employed at least 20 hours per week and at least five months per year, including
officers  and directors  who are employees,  are eligible to  participate in the
Stock Purchase Plan.  The Stock  Purchase Plan consists  of periodic  offerings,
with  the first offering planned to begin  on April 1, 1997. Each offering under
the Stock Purchase  Plan will  be for a  period determined  by the  Compensation
Committee  of the Board of  Directors, but not to  exceed 27 months. An employee
may elect to have up to a maximum of 10% deducted from his or her regular salary
for the purpose of purchasing shares under the Stock Purchase Plan. The price at
which the employee's shares are purchased is the lower of (a) 85% of the closing
price of the Common Stock on the day  that the offering commences or (b) 85%  of
the  closing price of the Common Stock  on the day that the offering terminates.
No shares have been issued under the Stock Purchase Plan.
 
4.  LEASES
    During 1993,  the Company  moved into  new leased  office and  manufacturing
space  of 35,410 square feet under a noncancelable operating lease which expires
on July 31,  1998 and contains  an option to  renew for up  to three  additional
years.   The  Company  is  also  responsible   for  all  taxes,  utilities,  and
assessments. Rent expense for all leases  was approximately $21,000 for each  of
the  three month periods  ended March 30,  1996 and April  1, 1995, and $87,000,
$107,000 and $129,000 for the years ended  December 31, in 1995, 1994 and  1993,
respectively.
 
    At December 31, 1995, future minimum lease payments due, excluding taxes and
utilities, were as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                 YEAR ENDING
                DECEMBER 31,                    AMOUNT
               ---------------                 --------
<S>                                            <C>
  1996.......................................  $ 84,000
  1997.......................................    84,000
  1998.......................................    50,000
                                               --------
                                               $218,000
                                               --------
                                               --------
</TABLE>
 
5.  LICENSING AND ROYALTY AGREEMENTS
    The Company has a licensing agreement with a minority shareholder whereby it
received  all associated laser printer  technology, including rights to patents,
know-how, software, firmware, documentation and access to their experts who were
involved  in  the  development  effort.  The  Company  also  received   multiple
prototypes of two models. In return, the minority shareholder receives royalties
of  up to 2%  of net revenues from  laser imager sales  and received warrants to
purchase shares of Common Stock  of the Company which  were issued in 1987.  The
warrants  expired during  1994. Royalty expense  relating to  this agreement was
$600 and  nil for  the three  months ended  March 30,  1996 and  April 1,  1995,
respectively, and $1,800, $9,014 and $11,640 for the years ended December 31, in
1995, 1994 and 1993, respectively.
 
    The  Company had a  software development and license  agreement with a third
party in which the Company was  to fund certain software development costs,  and
to  pay royalties on  products sold. The agreement  expired during 1994. Royalty
expense relating to this agreement was insignificant during 1994 and 1993.
 
                                      F-13
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
5.  LICENSING AND ROYALTY AGREEMENTS (CONTINUED)
    The Company has  purchased license rights  for up to  100,000 copies of  300
fonts  (typefaces) for $395,000. In December  1989, the Company paid $100,000 to
extend the original  agreement through  December 31, 1993.  These payments  have
been  included in intangible assets and were amortized over the four years ended
December 31, 1993.  During 1994 and  1995, the Company  extended this  agreement
through December 31, 1997 at no additional cost.
 
6.  BANK LINE OF CREDIT
    During 1995, due to its cash position, the Company did not renew its line of
credit  with a local bank.  The agreement had provided  for borrowings up to the
lesser of $1,000,000 or  75% of receivables outstanding  less than 90 days  from
invoice date.
 
7.  DEFERRED REVENUES
    During  1993, the Company entered into several agreements with customers for
the purchase of new products, supplies and research and development projects. As
part of  these  agreements,  the  Company  received  advance  payments  totaling
$755,712 during 1993. The Company had shipped equipment and supplies under these
agreements  totaling $142,750, $385,450 and $387,064 during 1995, 1994 and 1993,
respectively. During 1994, a customer, who is a shareholder, canceled a contract
for equipment which led to the forfeiture of certain equipment advances totaling
$679,434. As a  result of the  contract cancellation, the  Company devalued  the
related  inventory.  There  was no  material  gain  or loss  resulting  from the
contract cancellation.
 
8.  MAJOR CUSTOMERS AND EXPORT REVENUES
    Revenues to one customer,  excluding the related  party total revenues  (see
note  10), amounted to  $539,000 (29.4% of total  revenues) and $253,000 (14.0%)
for the three  months ended  March 30,  1996 and  April 1,  1995 and  $1,464,000
(17.5%), $140,000 (2.1%) and nil for the years ended December 31, 1995, 1994 and
1993,  respectively.  No  other customer  accounted  for  10% or  more  of total
revenues for these periods.
 
    The Company's export revenues did not  exceed 10% of total revenues for  the
three  months ended March 30, 1996 and April 1, 1995 or the years ended December
31, 1995, 1994 and 1993.
 
9.  INCOME TAXES
    The Company  records  income taxes  under  the provisions  of  Statement  of
Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No. 109, "Accounting for Income Taxes."
 
    For income tax purposes, the Company had net operating loss carryforwards of
approximately   $10,500,000  as  of  December  31,  1995.  If  not  used,  these
carryforwards will begin to expire  in 2001. Under the  Tax Reform Act of  1986,
certain future changes in ownership resulting from the sale or issuance of stock
may  limit the amount of net operating  loss carryforwards which can be utilized
on an annual basis.
 
   
    Deferred tax assets and liabilities represent temporary differences  between
the  basis of  assets and liabilities  for financial reporting  purposes and tax
purposes. Deferred tax  assets are  primarily comprised of  reserves which  have
been  deducted for financial statement purposes,  but have not been deducted for
income tax purposes and the tax effect of net operating loss carryforwards.  The
Company  has  recorded a  valuation allowance  to  reduce recorded  deferred tax
assets to zero because management believes it  is more likely than not that  the
Company will not utilize the deferred tax assets.
    
 
                                      F-14
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
9.  INCOME TAXES (CONTINUED)
    Deferred taxes as of December 31, 1995 and 1994 are summarized as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                  1995         1994
                                               -----------  -----------
<S>                                            <C>          <C>
Current deferred tax assets:
  Inventory reserves.........................  $   192,000  $   181,000
  Accrued vacation...........................       35,000       30,000
  Allowance for doubtful accounts............        9,000        8,000
  Other......................................       18,000       24,000
  Valuation allowance........................     (254,000)    (243,000)
                                               -----------  -----------
    Total....................................  $   --       $   --
                                               -----------  -----------
                                               -----------  -----------
Long-term deferred tax assets:
  Tax net operating loss carryforwards.......    3,675,000    4,305,000
  Tax credit carryforwards...................       32,000      --
  Valuation allowance........................   (3,707,000)  (4,305,000)
                                               -----------  -----------
    Total....................................  $   --       $   --
                                               -----------  -----------
                                               -----------  -----------
</TABLE>
 
    A  reconciliation of the expected federal  income taxes, using the effective
statutory federal  rate  of 35%,  with  the provision  for  income taxes  is  as
follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                 1995       1994       1993
                                               ---------  ---------  ---------
<S>                                            <C>        <C>        <C>
Expected federal expense (benefit)...........  $ 635,000  $ 275,000  $(421,300)
State taxes, net of federal benefits.........      2,000      2,000      1,109
Net operating loss which cannot currently be
 recognized..................................     --         --        419,200
Change in valuation allowance................   (587,000)  (275,000)    --
Other........................................    (27,500)    --          2,100
                                               ---------  ---------  ---------
                                               $  22,500  $   2,000  $   1,109
                                               ---------  ---------  ---------
                                               ---------  ---------  ---------
</TABLE>
 
10. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
   
    The Company sells products to two of its shareholders and also contracts for
certain products and production services with these shareholders. In addition to
revenues from affiliates and accounts receivable from affiliates as shown on the
financial  statements, a summary of  these transactions as of  and for the three
months ended March 30, 1996 and April  1, 1995 and the years ended December  31,
1995, 1994 and 1993 are as follows:
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                DECEMBER 31,
                                               MARCH 30,   APRIL 1,  ----------------------------------
                                                 1996        1995       1995        1994        1993
                                               ---------   --------  ----------  ----------  ----------
<S>                                            <C>         <C>       <C>         <C>         <C>
Total purchases of production services.......  $  1,000    $  1,000  $   44,000  $   91,000  $  210,000
Accounts payable.............................     1,000       1,000      --           8,000      28,000
</TABLE>
    
 
11. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES
    During  1995,  the Company  received a  favorable  arbitration award  from a
dispute with A.  B. Dick Company,  a former customer.  The Company recognized  a
gain  of $192,000 after expenses of approximately $142,000 in this dispute. This
gain is included in the statements of operations under other income (expense).
 
                                      F-15
<PAGE>
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
            NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED
        MARCH 30, 1996 AND APRIL 1, 1995 (UNAUDITED) AND THE YEARS ENDED
                  DECEMBER 31, 1995, 1994 AND 1993 (CONTINUED)
 
11. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (CONTINUED)
    The Company is involved in various other legal actions in the normal  course
of  business. Management is of the opinion that the outcome of such actions will
not have a significant effect on the Company's financial position or results  of
operations.
 
    401(K) PROFIT SHARING PLAN
 
    The  Company's  401(k)  Profit  Sharing  Plan  (the  "401(k)  Plan")  became
effective August 1, 1994. The 401(k)  Plan is intended to qualify under  Section
401(k)  of the Internal Revenue  Code. All employees employed  by the Company in
the United States for at least 30 hours per week are eligible to participate  in
the 401(k) Plan as of the next calendar quarter following one year after date of
hire  by the Company. Each eligible employee  may contribute to the 401(k) Plan,
through payroll deductions, up to 15% of his or her salary, subject to statutory
limitations.  The  401(k)  Plan  permits,  but  does  not  require,   additional
contributions  to the 401(k) Plan by the Company of up to 2% of the compensation
paid by  the Company  to each  employee in  the previous  calendar quarter.  The
Company's  contributions are made  at the discretion of  the Board of Directors,
within the limits of the 401(k) Plan. The Company has made a contribution of  1%
of  the  compensation  of each  participating  employee each  quarter  since the
adoption of the 401(k) Plan. The Company's contributions to the 401(k) Plan were
$4,576 and $4,246 for the  three months ended March 30,  1996 and April 1,  1995
and  $13,352  and  $4,769  for  the years  ended  December  31,  1995  and 1994,
respectively. There were no contributions in 1993.
 
12. SUBSEQUENT EVENTS
    The Company is planning  an initial public offering  of 1,200,000 shares  of
Common  Stock at an assumed initial public offering price of $6.50 per share. In
addition, current shareholders are  planning to offer  400,000 shares of  Common
Stock  to the public at such time. The Company will grant to the Underwriters an
over-allotment option pursuant to which an additional 240,000 shares may be sold
(180,000 shares from the Company  and 60,000 shares from existing  shareholders)
on  the same terms for the purpose  of covering any over-allotment sales made in
the public offering. In  connection with the  proposed initial public  offering,
the  Representative of the Underwriters would be granted warrants to purchase up
to 120,000 shares of Common  Stock at 120% of  the price to public,  exercisable
commencing one year after the date of the Offering for a period of four years.
 
                                      F-16
<PAGE>
 
                          [INSIDE BACK COVER GRAPHICS]
 
Photographs showing various Printware products:
 
Top right-hand photo:       Model 1440 APF Platesetter
Text below photo:           The Model 1440 APF Platesetter for bulk-fed metal
                             printing plates.
 
Middle right-hand photo:    Model 1440 EZ Platesetter
Text next to photo:         The Model 1440 EZ Platesetter produces paper and
                             metal printing plates.
 
Lower right-hand photo:     Supplies for Model 1440 Platesetters
Text next to photo:         Printware provides a full line of supplies for its
                             Model 1440 Platesetters.
 
Top left-hand photo:        Model 1440 ZNX Platesetter
Text below photo:           The Model 1440 ZNX Platesetter produces paper
                             printing plates directly from a computer.
 
Bottom left-hand photo:     Raster Image Processor
Text below photo:           Raster Image Processor (RIPs) connect Platesetters
                             to computer networks.
 
<PAGE>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
    NO  DEALER,  SALESPERSON OR  OTHER PERSON  HAS BEEN  AUTHORIZED TO  GIVE ANY
INFORMATION OR TO MAKE  ANY REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED  IN THIS PROSPECTUS  IN
CONNECTION  WITH THE OFFER MADE  IN THIS PROSPECTUS AND,  IF GIVEN OR MADE, SUCH
INFORMATION OR REPRESENTATION MUST NOT BE RELIED UPON AS HAVING BEEN  AUTHORIZED
BY  THE COMPANY, THE  UNDERWRITERS OR THE  SELLING SHAREHOLDERS. THIS PROSPECTUS
DOES NOT CONSTITUTE AN OFFER TO SELL OR  SOLICITATION OF AN OFFER TO BUY ANY  OF
THE  SECURITIES OFFERED HEREBY BY ANYONE IN ANY JURISDICTION IN WHICH SUCH OFFER
OR SOLICITATION IS NOT AUTHORIZED  OR IN WHICH THE  PERSON MAKING SUCH OFFER  OR
SOLICITATION  IS NOT QUALIFIED TO DO  SO OR TO ANYONE TO  WHOM IT IS UNLAWFUL TO
MAKE SUCH OFFER OR SOLICITATION. NEITHER THE DELIVERY OF THIS PROSPECTUS NOR ANY
SALE MADE HEREUNDER SHALL  UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES  CREATE ANY IMPLICATION  THAT
THE  AFFAIRS OF THE COMPANY  SINCE THE DATE HEREOF  OR THE INFORMATION HEREIN IS
CORRECT AS OF ANY TIME SUBSEQUENT TO THE DATE OF THIS PROSPECTUS.
                             ---------------------
 
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                            PAGE
                                                                            ----
<S>                                                                         <C>
Prospectus Summary........................................................     3
Risk Factors..............................................................     5
Use of Proceeds...........................................................     8
Dividend Policy...........................................................     8
Capitalization............................................................     8
Dilution..................................................................     9
Selected Financial Data...................................................    10
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
 Operations...............................................................    11
Business..................................................................    16
Management................................................................    25
Certain Transactions......................................................    30
Principal and Selling Shareholders........................................    31
Description of Capital Stock..............................................    32
Shares Eligible for Future Sales..........................................    33
Underwriting..............................................................    35
Experts...................................................................    36
Legal Matters.............................................................    36
Additional Information....................................................    37
Index to Financial Statements.............................................   F-1
</TABLE>
    
 
                             ---------------------
 
    UNTIL            , 1996, ALL  DEALERS EFFECTING TRANSACTIONS  IN THE  COMMON
STOCK,  WHETHER OR  NOT PARTICIPATING IN  THIS DISTRIBUTION, MAY  BE REQUIRED TO
DELIVER A  PROSPECTUS. THIS  IS IN  ADDITION  TO THE  OBLIGATION OF  DEALERS  TO
DELIVER  A  PROSPECTUS WHEN  ACTING AS  UNDERWRITERS AND  WITH RESPECT  TO THEIR
UNSOLD ALLOTMENTS OR SUBSCRIPTIONS.
 
                                1,600,000 SHARES
 
                                     [LOGO]
 
                                  COMMON STOCK
 
                             ---------------------
 
                                   PROSPECTUS
 
                               ------------------
 
                              [R.J. STEICHEN LOGO]
 
                                          , 1996
 
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>
                                    PART II
                     INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
 
ITEM 13.  OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.
 
    The  following fees and expenses  will be paid by  the Company in connection
with issuance and distribution  of the securities registered  hereby and do  not
include underwriting commissions and discounts. All of such expenses, except for
the SEC, NASD and Nasdaq fees are estimated.
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                 <C>
SEC registration fee..............................................  $   4,441
NASD filing fee...................................................      1,788
Nasdaq fee........................................................     36,750
Legal fees and expenses...........................................     55,000
Accounting fees and expenses......................................     50,000
Blue Sky fees and expenses........................................      1,800
Transfer agent and registrar fees.................................      1,000
Printing expenses.................................................     60,000
Miscellaneous.....................................................     26,221
                                                                    ---------
    Total.........................................................  $ 237,000
                                                                    ---------
                                                                    ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
ITEM 14.  INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS.
 
    The  Articles of  Incorporation and  Bylaws of  Printware, Inc.  provide for
indemnification of  directors to  the  full extent  permitted by  the  Minnesota
Business  Corporation Act.  Minnesota Statutes  Section302A.521 provides  that a
Minnesota business corporation shall  indemnify any director, officer,  employee
or  agent  of  the corporation  made  or threatened  to  be  made a  party  to a
proceeding, by reason  of the former  or present official  capacity (as  defined
therein)  of the  person, against  judgments, penalties,  fines, settlements and
reasonable expenses incurred by the person in connection with the proceeding  if
certain statutory standards are met. "Proceeding" means a threatened, pending or
completed   civil,  criminal,   administrative,  arbitration   or  investigative
proceeding, including one by or in the right of Printware, Inc.
 
    Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities  Act
may  be permitted to directors, officers  or persons controlling Printware, Inc.
pursuant to the foregoing provisions, Printware, Inc. has been informed that  in
the  opinion of the  Securities and Exchange  Commission such indemnification is
against public  policy as  expressed  in the  Securities  Act and  is  therefore
unenforceable.
 
    Under  Section  7(c)  of the  Underwriting  Agreement filed  as  Exhibit 1.1
hereto, the  Underwriters  agree to  indemnify,  under certain  conditions,  the
Company,  its directors,  certain of  its officers  and persons  who control the
Company within the meaning of the Securities Act against certain liabilities.
 
ITEM 15.  RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.
 
    The information in this  Item gives retroactive  effect to the  one-for-four
reverse stock split of the Company which was effective April 25, 1996.
 
                                      II-1
<PAGE>
    The  Company has sold the following  unregistered securities during the past
three years (since March 30, 1993):
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                NO. SHARES OF       PRICE
  DATE                 PURCHASER                COMMON STOCK      PER SHARE
- ---------  ---------------------------------  -----------------  -----------
<C>        <S>                                <C>                <C>
04/21/93   William Fuess, Esq.(1)                       587       $    3.00
09/01/93   William Fuess, Esq.(1)                       300            3.00
11/26/93   Employee ISO exercise                        650            3.00
11/26/93   Employee ISO exercise                         50            3.00
12/27/93   Employee ISO exercise                         50            3.00
 
01/22/94   Daniel A. Baker(2)                         2,500            3.00
02/11/94   Employee ISO exercise                         50            3.00
03/14/94   Employee ISO exercise                         50            3.00
03/18/94   William Fuess, Esq.(1)                       300            3.00
08/30/94   Employee ISO exercise                         25            3.00
10/28/94   Employee ISO exercise                         25            3.00
12/29/94   Minnesota Technology, Inc.(3)              5,500            3.00
 
01/20/95   Employee ISO exercise                         75            3.00
01/22/95   Daniel A. Baker(2)                         2,500            3.00
03/24/95   Employee ISO exercise                        262            3.00
09/29/95   Employee ISO exercise                         25            3.00
12/01/95   Employee ISO exercise                        375            3.00
01/22/96   Daniel A. Baker(2)                         2,500            3.00
02/28/96   Employee ISO exercise                        200            3.00
</TABLE>
    
 
- ---------------------
   
(1) These  shares were  issused to  William Fuess,  Esq., the  Company's  patent
    counsel, in consideration for patent services he provided to the Company.
    
 
   
(2)  These shares were issued to Dr. Baker pursuant to an agreement made between
    him and  the Company  in January  1993  that provided  that if  he  remained
    employed  by the  Company he  would be  issued a  total of  10,000 shares in
    annual installments  of  2,500 shares.  Each  issuance of  shares  has  been
    accounted for as taxable compensation.
    
 
   
(3)  These  shares were  issued to  Minnesota  Technology, Inc.  as part  of the
    extinguishment of debt owed to it by the Company that is referred to in  the
    fourth paragraph of footnote 3 to the Financial Statements.
    
 
   
    Each of the above transactions involved the offering of such securities to a
limited  number of persons who took the securities as an investment for his, her
or its own account and not with a view to a distribution thereof. Based in  part
on  the foregoing the Company has been  advised by counsel that the transactions
enumerated above were transactions not involving any public offering within  the
meaning of Sections 3(b) or 4(2) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
    
 
ITEM 16.  EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES
 
    (a) Exhibits
 
   
<TABLE>
<C>       <S>
   1.1*   Underwriting Agreement
   1.2*   Selected Dealers' Agreement
   1.3*   Agreement Among Underwriters
   3.1*   Articles of Incorporation, as amended
   3.2*   Bylaws of the Company
   4.1*   Form of Common Stock Certificate
   5.1*   Opinion of Lindquist & Vennum P.L.L.P.
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      II-2
<PAGE>
   
<TABLE>
<C>       <S>
  10.1*   Incentive Stock Option Plan of 1985
  10.2*   1986 Incentive Stock Option Plan
  10.3*   1996 Stock Plan
  10.4*   1996 Employee Stock Purchase Plan
  10.5*   Form of 1996 Bonus Compensation Plan for executive officers
  10.6*   Change in Control Severance Agreement dated April 25, 1996
  10.7*   Office/Warehouse Lease dated December 22, 1992 between the Company and
           The Northwestern Mutual Life Insurance Company
  10.8    Plate  Material Agreement dated December  11, 1991 between the Company
           and E.J. Gaisser, Inc.(1)
  10.9    Supply Agreement dated May 2, 1991 between the Company and  Polychrome
           Corporation(1)
  10.10*  License  Agreement  dated May  17, 1985  among the  Company, Minnesota
           Mining and Manufacturing Company and Allen L. Taylor
  10.11   Purchase Agreement  dated  January 1,  1995  between the  Company  and
           Deluxe Corporation, as amended December 12, 1995(1)
  11.1*   Statement re computation of Per Share Earnings/Losses
  23.1    Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP
  23.2*   Consent of Lindquist & Vennum P.L.L.P., included in Exhibit 5.1
  24.1*   Power of Attorney, included in the Signature Page
</TABLE>
    
 
- ---------------------------
   
 *  Previously filed with the initial filing of this Registration Statement.
    
 
(1)  Certain information has been deleted from this exhibit and filed separately
    with the  Securities  and Exchange  Commission  pursuant to  a  request  for
    confidential treatment under Rule 406.
 
    (b) Financial Statement Schedules
 
   
    Schedule II Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
    
 
   
        All  other  schedules  have been  omitted  because they  are  either not
    required, are not applicable,  or the required information  is shown in  the
    Financial Statements and related notes.
    
 
ITEM 17.  UNDERTAKINGS
 
    Insofar  as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act
of 1933 may be permitted to  directors, officers and controlling persons of  the
Registrant  pursuant to the  foregoing provisions, or  otherwise, the Registrant
has been advised that in the  opinion of the Securities and Exchange  Commission
such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act
and  is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification
against such liabilities (other than the  payment by the Registrant of  expenses
incurred  or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the Registrant
in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such
director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities  being
registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter
had  been settled  by controlling  precedent, submit  to a  court of appropriate
jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is public policy as
expressed in the Securities Act and  will be governed by the final  adjudication
of such issue.
 
    The Registrant hereby undertakes that:
 
        (1)  It will provide to the Underwriter  at the closing specified in the
    Underwriting Agreement certificates in such denominations and registered  in
    such  names as required by the Underwriter to permit prompt delivery to each
    purchaser.
 
                                      II-3
<PAGE>
        (2) For purposes of determining  any liability under the Securities  Act
    of  1933, the information omitted from the  form of prospectus filed as part
    of this Registration Statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a
    form of prospectus  filed by the  Registrant pursuant to  Rule 424(b)(1)  or
    (4),  or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall  be deemed to be part of this
    Registration Statement as of the time it was declared effective.
 
        (3) For the purpose  of determining any  liability under the  Securities
    Act  of  1933,  each  post-effective  amendment  that  contains  a  form  of
    prospectus shall be deemed  to be a new  registration statement relating  to
    the securities offered therein, and this offering of such securities at that
    time be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
 
                                      II-4
<PAGE>
                                   SIGNATURES
 
   
    Pursuant  to the requirements of the  Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant
has duly caused this Amendment No. 2 to the Registration Statement to be  signed
on  its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of St.
Paul, State of Minnesota, on the 27th day of June, 1996.
    
 
   
                                PRINTWARE, INC.
 
                                By:              /s/ DANIEL A. BAKER
                                         -----------------------------------
                                               Daniel A. Baker, Ph.D.,
                                         PRESIDENT, CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
                                                    AND DIRECTOR
 
    
 
   
    Pursuant to the requirements of the  Securities Act of 1933, this  Amendment
No.  2 to the Registration  Statement has been signed below  on June 27, 1996 by
the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
               SIGNATURE                           TITLE
- ----------------------------------------  ------------------------
<C>                                       <S>                       <C>
                   *                      President, Chief
  ------------------------------------     Executive Officer and
         Daniel A. Baker, Ph.D.            Director
 
                                          Executive Vice President
                   *                       and Chief Financial
  ------------------------------------     Officer (principal
          Thomas W. Petschauer             financial and
                                           accounting officer)
 
                                                                    *By  /s/ DANIEL A. BAKER
                   *                                                 ----------------------
  ------------------------------------    Director                      ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
         Allen L. Taylor, Ph.D.                                           June 27, 1996
 
                   *
  ------------------------------------    Director
            Donald V. Mager
 
                   *
  ------------------------------------    Director and Secretary
           Brian D. Shiffman
 
                   *
  ------------------------------------    Director
            Jerry K. Twogood
 
                   *
  ------------------------------------    Director
           Charles M. Osborne
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      II-5
<PAGE>
                SCHEDULE II -- VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                              ADDITIONS
                                                     ---------------------------
                                        BALANCE AT   CHARGED TO
                                       BEGINNING OF   COSTS AND     CHARGED TO    DEDUCTIONS --   BALANCE AT END
DESCRIPTION                               PERIOD      EXPENSES    OTHER ACCOUNTS    WRITE-OFFS      OF PERIOD
- -------------------------------------  ------------  -----------  --------------  --------------  --------------
<S>                                    <C>           <C>          <C>             <C>             <C>
Year ended December 31, 1995
    Allowance for Doubtful
     Accounts........................   $   21,538    $  --        $    4,335(1)   $       (960)    $   24,913
    Inventory Reserve................      516,039      374,000         --             (344,920)       545,119
 
Year ended December 31, 1994
    Allowance for Doubtful
     Accounts........................   $   67,263    $ (31,000)   $    --         $    (14,725)    $   21,538
    Inventory Reserve................      525,126      215,000       679,434(2)       (903,521)       516,039
 
Year ended December 31, 1993.........
    Allowance for Doubtful
     Accounts........................   $   67,600    $  36,000    $    --         $    (36,337)    $   67,263
    Inventory Reserve................      553,690      560,000         --             (588,564)       525,126
</TABLE>
 
- ---------------------
(1) Collection of customer accounts previously written off.
 
(2) Inventory related to cancelled production contract.


<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 10.8

Certain portions of this Exhibit have been deleted and filed separately with the
Commission pursuant to Rule 406. (Spaces corresponding to deleted portions
appear in brackets with asterisks.)
                                                               December 11, 1991

                            PLATE MATERIAL AGREEMENT

                               PRINTWARE - GAISSER

PURPOSE:  The purpose of this agreement is to establish the criteria for a
business relationship between PRINTWARE, Inc., a Minnesota Corporation, having
its principal offices at 1385 Mendota Heights Road, St. Paul, Minnesota 55120,
herein after referred to as "PRINTWARE," and E. J. Gaisser, Inc., a Connecticut
Corporation, having its principal offices at 49 Liberty Place, Stamford, CT,
06904 hereinafter referred to as "Gaisser," for the distribution of
electrostatic material for use in the PRINTWARE 1440 plate imager and its
variations.  This agreement clarifies and supersedes the Plate Material
Agreement dated April 21, 1988.

CONFIDENTIALITY:  Certain trade information, 1440 plate imager information, and
future product information shall be kept confidential per Attachment A.

PRODUCTS:  Products include "Economy grade plate material" and "Premium-grade
plate material."  Future products may be added by mutual agreement.

PRODUCT QUALITY:  The plate material to be initially supplied by Gaisser shall
be of customer acceptable quality, and shall meet the specifications per
Attachment B.  Future specifications may define additional materials.  In the
event that materials do not meet the specifications or standards of customer
acceptable quality, Gaisser shall accept the returned material for credit. 
Gaisser shall not be held liable for consequential damages as a result of
defective plate material.

EXCLUSIVITY:  PRINTWARE shall make its reasonable best efforts to market and
sell the Gaisser plate materials.  Gaisser shall not, independently of
PRINTWARE, distribute or provide for distribution electrostatic infrared-
sensitive material usable in the PRINTWARE 1440 plate imager or its variations.

MINIMUM PURCHASE:  In consideration of such exclusivity, and subject to
PRINTWARE's continued determination that the materials are of acceptable
quality, PRINTWARE agrees to purchase a minimum of $600,000 in plate material
from Gaisser in each year beginning January 1, 1992.  If the minimum purchase
quantities are not met without good cause, Gaisser's only remedy is relief from
exclusivity restrictions.

PLATE MATERIAL PRICE:  The price of Premium-grade plate material shall not
exceed $0.12/square foot and the price of the Economy-grade plate material shall
not exceed $0.091/square foot for the period ending June 30, 1992.



<PAGE>

PLATE MATERIAL PRICE ADJUSTMENTS:  Subsequent price increases shall not exceed
the sum of 80% of the change in the Producer Price Index in the period between
plate material price adjustments as reported by the U.S. Department of
Commerces, and 20% of the change in the average price paid by Gaisser for raw
paper stock from the previous plate material price adjustment.  Gaisser shall
provide evidence, such as invoices, of price changes in raw paper stock.  Price
adjustments shall occur on June 30, 1992 and then annually beginning January 1,
1993.

DYE SUPPLY:  In consideration of exclusivity, PRINTWARE agrees to supply
infrared-sensitive dyes to Gaisser for use in the plate materials at PRINTWARE'S
then current standard cost.  The standard cost of the dye as of November 8,
1991, was $6.54/gram.

PRINTWARE SUPPORT:  In consideration of exclusivity during the term of this
agreement, PRINTWARE agrees to provide production support to Gaisser including
the loan of a 1440 plate imager, and reasonable technical support of the
refinement and production of the plate material by PRINTWARE personnel.

TERM:  The term of this Agreement shall extend from the date shown above until
the first to occur of the following dates:  (a) the date, if any, mutually
agreed to in writing by both parties for the termination of the term of this
Agreement; (b) either party defaults in the performance or compliance with any
material provision of this Agreement and such default has not been remedied
within thirty days after the date the other party gives written notice to the
defaulting party; or (c) either party ceases to function as a going concern.

ENFORCEABILITY:  Delay or failure of either party in exercising any right
hereunder or partial or single exercise thereof, shall not be deemed to
constitute the waiver of that right.  If any provision of this Agreement shall
become inoperative or unenforceable as applied in any particular case or becomes
in conflict with any other provisions hereof, such circumstances shall not have
the effect of rendering the provision in question invalid, inoperative or
unenforceable in any other case or circumstances.  The invalidity of any
provision of this Agreement shall not affect the remaining provisions of this
Agreement.

EXCUSABLE DELAYS AND DEFAULT:  Either party shall be excused from any delay or
failure in performance hereunder caused by reason of any occurrence of
contingency beyond its reasonable control, including, but not limited to an act
of God, earthquake, labor disputes, fiats, governmental requirements, inability
to secure materials and transportation difficulties.  The obligations and rights
of the party so excused shall be extended on a day-to-day basis for the time
period equal to the period of such excusable delay.

GOVERNING LAW/ARBITRATION:  All disputes and controversies arising out of the
performance of this Agreement shall be settled by arbitration in Chicago,
Illinois as a neutral venue.  The arbitrators shall have substantial familiarity
with the subject matter at issue.


                                       2


<PAGE>

WARRANTY:  Gaisser warrants its products conform to the statements made in
Attachment B; to meet customer acceptable quality standards; to be free of
defects in material and workmanship for a period of eighteen months from the
date of sale by Gaisser; not to infringe a valid U.S. Patent; and to be free of
title encumbrance.  Gaisser will credit PRINTWARE's account upon determination
of defective material.


PAYMENT:  Payment for purchase orders shall be net thirty (30) days from the
date of shipment.

COMPLETE AGREEMENT AND AMENDMENT:  This Agreement contains the entire agreement
of the parties, and no representation, inducements, promises or agreements, oral
or otherwise, among the parties not embodied herein shall be of any force or
effect; provided, however, that the terms of this Agreement may be changed,
amended, or waived by a subsequent writing signed each of the parties hereto.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have duly executed this Agreement as of the 12th
day of December, 1991.

PRINTWARE, Inc.                         E. J. Gaisser Inc.


By   /s/ Daniel Baker                   By    /s/ James H. Gaisser    12-16-91
  ----------------------------------      ------------------------------------

  Its      Vice President                 Its    President            
     -------------------------------         ---------------------------------



                                       3


<PAGE>

ATTACHMENT A: CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION

Printware Confidential Information Includes, but is not limited to the following
items:

1.   Plate Material Specification P/N 802222

2.   Printware Customer Lists

3.   Pricing of Plate Material Sold by Gaisser to Printware

4.   Printware Customer Pricing



                                       4


<PAGE>


                                  ATTACHMENT B


                                 PRINTWARE INC.

                                     1440 PS

                          ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL

                       PART NUMBER 802222-TAB   REV 5/1/91

                              CONFIDENTIAL MATERIAL
                        NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT REQUIRED

   
    


<PAGE>
   
                                      PRINTWARE 
                             ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL

                                 P/N 8022222-TAB REV

1.0 SCOPE

This document establishes the requirements for the lithographic printing plate
to be used in the Printware Model 1440es Platemaker.

A lithographic Electrostatic printing plate consists of an offset master base
paper and an eletrophotographic layer.  It is to be imaged in the Printware
Model 1440es Platemaker in the following sequence:

    Charging
    Exposure by laser diode
    Liquid electrostatic toner development
    Heating to dry and fuse the toner

This printing plate will be run on commercially available manual and automatic
offset presses after the plate has been treated with an electrostatic conversion
solution.

For purposes of periodic audits, characterization and qualification, evaluations
shall be made to the limits of this document and specified reference documents.

Specified values within this specification without tolerances shall be regarded
as nominal values.

2.0 DOCUMENTS

Applicable documents, of issue in effect on the date of invitation for bid, form
a part of this specification.

Order of precedence shall be as follows:

2.1 Applicable OEM Purchase Agreement
2.2 This Document
2.3 MIL-STD-105D, Sampling Procedure and Tables for Inspection by Attributes

                                       2

    
<PAGE>
   
                                      PRINTWARE
                             ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL

                                    P/N 802222-TAB

3.0 REQUIREMENTS

3.1 PHYSICAL

Configuration - Rolls

Winding - Infrared sensitive or coated side out.

Length - 400 feet.

Roll Diameter - Not to exceed 7.5 inches.

Core Diameter - 3 3/4'' ID, 4 1/4'' OD.

Roll Width - as indicated + or - 1/64 inch

Core Width - Roll width + 0 -1/8 inch.

Width of roll; economy grade:

                           Rolls                                   Rolls
Dash No.    Roll Width    Per Box        Dash No.  Roll Width     Per Box
- --------    ----------    -------        --------  ----------     -------
- -001           8 inch        2              -101      8 inch         2
- -002           9 inch        2              -102      9 inch         2
- -003          10 inch        2              -103      10 inch        2
- -004          11 inch        2              -104      11 inch        2
- -005          12 inch        2              -105      12 inch        2
- -010          13 inch        2              -110      13 inch        2
- -008          14 inch        2              -108      14 inch        2
- -006          14.563 inch    2              -106      14.563 inch    2
- -007          15 inch        2              -107      15 inch        2

Basis Weight 95/lb 3300 ft(2), economy grade; 101lb/3300 ft(2), premium grade.

[**]

- --------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       3


    
<PAGE>
   

3.2 MECHANICAL

3.2.1    Plate must be machine compatible with the Printware Model 1440es
         Platesetter.

3.2.2    Plate must be acceptable to handling under normal press operating
         conditions.

3.2.3    Plate must work with common convertors, both off-line and those that
         are on-line with offset presses.

3.3  ELECTRICAL

3.3.1    Exposure Sensitivity: 780 nm.

3.3.2    Charge acceptance:  TBD

3.3.3    Dark decay: TBD

3.3.4    Laser light decay:  TBD

                                       4


    
<PAGE>
   

                                      PRINTWARE
                             ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                                    P/N 802222-TAB
3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL

Electrostatic Plate Material shall be capable of meeting all functional and
performance requirements of this specification when operated within the combined
environments shown without regarding any adjustments.

                        Ambient Temp   Relative Humidity    Altitude
                       -------------   -----------------   -----------
Storage                 65 to 75 F.       40% to 50%       0-8,200 Ft
Operating               50 to 90 F.       30% to 70%       0-8,200 Ft
Transport              -40 to 122 F.       0% to 99%       0-40,000 Ft

Store in a cool, dry place in original packaging.  Keep in plastic bag when not
in use.

3.5  PERFORMANCE

3.5.1.   The plate shall perform both as a lithographic plate and as a camera
         ready copy.

3.5.2    [**]
       - [**]
         [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]

3.5.3    [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]
       - [**]

3.5.4    Run length, economy grade - 1000 impressions.
         Run length, premium grade - 10,000 impressions.

3.5.5    Stretch, economy grade - around press cylinder, short grain
         orientation for rolls 12'' or wider, long grain orientation for rolls
         under 12'', less than 2.0% at 1000 impressions. 
         Stretch, premium grade - around press cylinder, short grain 
         orientation for rolls 12'' or wider, long grain orientation for rolls
         under 12'', less than 0.2% at 1250 impressions.

3.5.6    Shelf life - 18 months.
                           
- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406. 

                                       5


    


<PAGE>
   

                                      PRINTWARE
                             ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                                  P/N 802222-TAB REV



4.0      QUALITY

4.1      Quality

Product design, material selection and manufacturing workmanship shall be in
accordance with standard industry practices such that products meet PRINTWARE
INC. incoming quality requirements per paragraph 4.2 of this specification. 
PRINTWARE INC. reserves the right to  conduct in-plant surveillance of vendor
operations to assure that quality procedures comply with contractual
requirements.

4.2 Incoming Requirements

    The indicated Receiving Inspection criteria shall be used to determine
    acceptability of lot quality levels.  All inspection procedures shall be in
    accordance with MIL-STD-105D Normal II level.

The following incoming acceptance procedure indicated in Appendix I shall be
performed in accordance with the following AQLAEs on a representative lot sample
as speciifed.

Workmanship                            0.65AQL
Mechanical Criteria and Electrical     0.65 AQL

4.3 Identification

Each roll shall have an identification number to allow traceability of its
manufacture.

    xxx - yy - zz
     |     |   ||        
     |     |   ||________Position across jumbo roll width (A to E)
     |     |   |________# of set as taken from jumbo roll diameter 
     |     |            (1-25, where 1 is the top)
     |     |____________Jumbo roll #
     |_______________Quality Control Lot #

The identification number shall be stamped on the end of the roll as close to
the core as possible.

Each box of plate material is to be marked with the quality control lot # and
jumbo roll #.

                                       6

    
<PAGE>
   

5.0 SHIPPING AND HANDLING

Preparation for delivery shall include unit packaging capable of protecting the
unit when shipped using a commercial common carrier.  PRINTWARE reserves the
right to test packaging to National Safe Transit Association (NSTA) to verify
compliance.

Pallet size   -    8'' - 11 1/4'' 120 rolls
                   a. 120 rolls, 60 cartons/pallet
                           (4 tiers, 15 cartons/tier)
                   b.  96 rolls, 48 cartons/pallet
                           (4 tiers, 12 cartons/tier)
                   12'' - 18'' rolls:
                   40 rolls, 20 cartons/pallet
                            (2 tiers, 10 cartons/tier)

Artwork master for box label to be approved by Printware, Inc. (See Figure 1.)

6.0 DESIGN OR PROCESS CHANGES

Notification of any process changes, design changes or material changes that
will affect fit, form or function, shall be made to PRINTWARE Purchasing
Department prior to shipment of the unit.  The information submitted shall
include a complete description of the change and the effect the change will have
on characteristics specified or unspecified of the unit.  The design, materials
and manufacturing process upon which approval was based, shall be the reference
to which requested changes will be compared.

7.0 APPROVED VENDOR LIST

E.J. Gaisser Company, Stamford, Connecticut  06902 

                                       7

    
<PAGE>
   


                              IR EP MASTER SPECIFICATION

                                  (TEST ENVIROMENT)

                               E.J. GAISSER GRADE CODE

                     PRINTWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 802222-TAB

TEST LOCATION(S):

    1.  E.J. Gaisser (Stamford) - QUALITY CERTIFIER
    2.  Printware - QUALITY MONITOR

TEST CONDITION:

1.  Imaging:  -  Hardware Printware 1440 Platesetter
              -  Environment: 67-77 F, 35-55% RH
              -  Toner:  Printware 821630 (Specification in Appendix II)
              -  Laser:  Calibrated by Printware
              -  Fuser setting 40% - 80%
              -  Test Image:  Process Control Test Image (Appendix III)
              -  Laser:  Dial - 0 to10
                         Top adjustment - 1/4 to 3/4
              -  Corona:  AC from 3-10
                          DC - full operational range
              -  Toner Bias:  Full operational range

2.  Conversion:    -  Hardware:  Prepco TP-16 convertor with a 18 rpm motor
                                 option, note that the plate must be useable 
                                 with Deluxe model 105 convertor.
                   -Solution:  Printware Conversion Solution 802239
                               (no more than 1 week old)
3.  Printing  -  Press:  A.B. Dick 369
              -  Ink:  A B Dick 101-2C with tack range of 16-20
              -  Fountain Solution:  Printware Fountain Solution mixed by 
                                     volume:
                   25 parts deionized or distilled water
                    2 parts isopropyl alcohol
                    5 parts conversion solution
              -  Stripe:  Ink form rollers to plate 3/16'' 
                          Plate to blanket 3/16'' 
                          Blanket to impression 3/16'' 
              -  Speed:  6000 - 8000 impressions per hour
              -  Paper:  Nekoosa 23# or 24# MICR bond 8.5'' x 11''  

                                       8

    
<PAGE>
   

                              IR EP MASTER SPECIFICATION

                                  (TEST ENVIRONMENT)

                               E.J. GAISSER GRADE CODE

                     PRINTWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 802222-TAB

    -    Plate size and press orientation:
         a.   12'' or wider rolls:  10'' x roll width with the roll width or 
              short grain dimension around the plate cylinder.

         b.   under 12'' wide rolls:  roll width x 15'' with the 15'' long 
              grain dimension around the plate cylinder.
              - Blanket wash:  AM Blankrola Power Solve
              - Environment:  67-77 F, 45-55% RH

TEST SAMPLES:

[**]







- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406. 

                                       9

    
<PAGE>
   

                                     APPENDIX II
                         PRINTWARE 821630 TONER SPECIFICATION


FUNCTIONAL PROPERTIES:                 821630

Charge to mass ratio (KG/Coulomb)      [**]                 
                                       ----------------------
Total charge (Microcolombs)            [**]                
                                       ----------------------
Conductivity (Picomhos/Cm)             [**]                
                                       ----------------------
Optical density                        [**]              
                                       ----------------------
% Solids                               [**]              
                                       ----------------------






- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       10
    


<PAGE>

                                                                    EXHIBIT 10.9

Certain portions of this Exhibit have been deleted and filed separately with the
Commission pursuant to Rule 406.  (Spaces corresponding to deleted portions
appear in brackets with asterisks.)

                                SUPPLY AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT is made as of the 2nd day of May 1991, between Polychrome
Corporation, a Division of Sun Chemical Corporation, a Delaware Corporation
having its principal offices at 137 Alexander Street, Yonkers, New York 10702
("POLYCHROME"), and Printware, Inc. a Minnesota Corporation, having its
principal offices at 1385 Mendota Heights Road, St. Paul, Minnesota 55120
("PRINTWARE").

WHEREAS, POLYCHROME and PRINTWARE have cooperated in and made valuable
contributions to the development of digital laser platemaking systems (the
"SYSTEMS"), comprised of tangible and intangible components including equipment,
consumables, technical services, know-how and proprietary and confidential
information ("SYSTEMS COMPONENTS"); and

WHEREAS, each party intends to sell SYSTEMS bearing its own label to third
parties on its own account; and

WHEREAS, in order to offer comprehensive SYSTEMS for sale to third parties, each
party wishes to obtain certain SYSTEMS COMPONENTS from the other;



<PAGE>


NOW, THEREFORE, the parties agree to the following:

1.0  DEFINITIONS

1.1  POLYCHROME shall mean Polychrome Corporation, Polychrome Ltd.,
Polychrome G.m.b.H., Polychrome France S.A.R.L., and any subsidiary or affiliate
of any one of them.

1.2  PRODUCTS shall mean those tangible SYSTEMS COMPONENTS set forth on SCHEDULE
1.2, attached hereto.  From time to time during the term of this Agreement, the
parties may add or delete PRODUCTS covered by the Agreement upon mutual written
agreement. 

1.3  SERVICES shall mean those services more specifically described in Section 7
below.

1.4  CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION shall mean all information which is disclosed by
either party to the other in connection with this Agreement and is specifically
designated in writing as such (or if disclosed orally, confirmed in writing
within thirty (30) days of such disclosure).  CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION does not
include information which is or becomes a matter of public knowledge without the
fault of the recipient party; was known to recipient party prior to disclosure
to it by the other party; or was or is received by the recipient party from a
third person under circumstances permitting its disclosure.  CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION shall be used solely for purposes contemplated by this Agreement
including provision of SERVICES and installation, operation, maintenance,
support and development of the PRODUCTS furnished hereunder.  CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION shall be protected by the recipient from disclosure to others to the
same extent it would protect its own confidential or proprietary information. 


                                       2

<PAGE>

1.5 TERM shall mean the period of two (2) years commencing on April 1, 1991 and
terminating on March 31, 1993; provided that this Agreement shall be
automatically renewed for successive one-year terms unless either party gives
the other written notice of termination at least one hundred and eighty (180)
days prior to the end of the term then in effect.

1.6  TERRITORY shall mean the United States, Canada and Europe.

2.0  DELIVERY

2.1  All PRODUCTS shall be sold F.O.B. point of manufacture, and according to
the ordering party's written instructions.  Risk of loss and title shall pass
when goods are placed with a common carrier.

2.2  The supplying party shall ship PRODUCTS in accordance with Purchase Orders,
packaged in adequate boxes or containers.  Any Purchase Order terms and
conditions at variance with or in addition to those of this Agreement shall be
of no force and effect.  The supplying party shall apply labels to and insert
health and safety information in the boxes and containers.  The supplying party
shall additionally label those products which it supplies with the ordering
party's logo and mark.  The ordering party shall furnish all appropriate copy
and artwork therefor at its expense.

2.3  The supplying party shall set and confirm delivery schedules immediately
upon receipt of a Purchase Order.  When existing priorities and schedules
prevent strict compliance with requested delivery dates, orders will be entered
as closely as possible to the requested delivery date and the ordering party
will be advised of the actual shipping schedule.  If a supplying party cannot
ship


                                       3

<PAGE>

duly ordered PRODUCTS within (30) days of dates requested the ordering party 
may cancel the order in whole, or in part, with no penalties or charges as 
otherwise defined under Section 3. 

2.4 Upon request, a supplying party shall assist the receiving party in
preparing such documentation as may be required to export any products to or
perform SERVICES at locations outside the country of origin, but all fees and
costs shall be for the receiving party's account.

3.0  PRICES

3.1  Unit prices shall be as set forth in SCHEDULE 1.2, subject to the
provisions for price adjustments herein.  Prices are firm for the first twelve
(12) months of this Agreement, except prices may be decreased at any time. 
Price decreases will apply to all orders shipped on or after the effective date
of the decrease. 

3.2  After the initial twelve (12) months, prices may be increased no more than
once per twelve (12) month period and then only provided the party increasing
the price gives the other party at least ninety (90) days notification before
the effective date of any such price change.  In the event of a price increase
notification the purchasing party may increase PRODUCT quantities purchased at
the then present price provided delivery is requested prior to the price
increase date; provided, however, that any such increased order shall be made in
good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner (taking into account such
factors as historical order figures).  Either party, after receipt of written
notification of a price increase, may terminate this Agreement without further
liability.  In the event of such termination, the parties agree to accept
shipments and to deliver units under the then scheduled Purchase Orders.


                                       4

<PAGE>

3.3  The foregoing notwithstanding, in the event the established pricing is not
industry competitive or does not provide reasonable gross margins for either
party, the parties agree to renegotiate prices in good faith.  In the event
reasonably industry-competitive pricing with reasonable margins is not achieved
for any reasons, either party may terminate this Agreement upon one hundred and
eighty (180) days' written notice and neither party shall have any further
liability to the other.

4.0  PAYMENTS

4.1  Terms of payment shall be net 30 days from date of invoice (which shall not
precede shipment).  For Polychrome Corporation, any payment mailed on or before,
and for non-domestic POLYCHROME affiliates a wire transfer sent before, the
thirtieth day from the date of invoice shall be deemed to have been made within
the 30 day period.  POLYCHROME shall receive an additional $3,000 discount for
each complete SYSTEM (i.e., platesetter and RIP system) purchased for the
continental United States with SERVICES (as set forth in Section 6.2) fully paid
for within fifteen (15) days.  All accounts unpaid after 30 days by either party
shall bear interest at the rate of one percent (1%) per month.

4.2  Each party reserves the right to suspend further deliveries if the other
fails to pay for any one shipment when payment becomes due and does not cure
within ten (10) days of written notice of such nonpayment.


                                       5

<PAGE>

5.0  ORDERS

5.1  Each party will provide to the other an initial ninety (90) day Blanket
Purchase Order for PRODUCTS and SERVICES, plus a forecast for the six (6) months
immediately following the ninety (90) day period.  Purchase Orders for the
months subsequent to the initial 90 day Blanket Purchase Order will be provided
monthly with each having a sixty (60) day lead time.  Subsequent six (6) month
forecasts will be provided quarterly.  Each party will advise the other of
significant forecast changes if they occur.

5.2  Blanket Purchase Order Releases and Subsequent Purchase Order Deferments or
Cancellations.

Either party may alter specific delivery dates or cancel orders specified in the
above in writing.  The degree of penalty is based upon the lead time given.

A party may, without cost, upon more than seven (7) days written notice prior to
scheduled shipment dates, defer shipment of any PRODUCT up to sixty (60) days. 
Delivery deferments provided within seven (7) days for same shall be subject to
a deferment charge of 7% of the invoice price.

A party may request an advance in a scheduled shipment date and the supplying 
party will use its reasonable best efforts to meet the requested delivery, at 
no additional cost.

A party shall have the right to cancel any shipment scheduled for delivery 
under any acknowledged Purchase Order by written notice of cancellation prior 
to the scheduled delivery date if such party is not in default of its 
obligations under this Agreement at time of such notice.  In any such case, 
the canceling party shall remit, within thirty (30) days following 
cancellation notice, a cancellation fee according to the following schedule:


                                       6

<PAGE>

Days before scheduled              Cancellation fee as
shipment date that                 percentage of invoice price 
cancellation notice received
 0   -    30 days                  30%
31   -    60 days                  10%
61   -    or more                   0%

5.3  Changes.  By mutual agreement an order may be suspended or changes may be
made in quantity, model types, options, place of delivery, methods of shipment,
or other particulars.  If any such change causes an increase or decrease in the
price of the PRODUCTS or in the time required for performance, the supplying
party shall promptly notify the requesting party and an equitable adjustment
shall be made.  No changes shall be effective unless agreed to in writing by
both parties.

6.0  SERVICES

6.1  PRINTWARE shall provide POLYCHROME and POLYCHROME's present and prospective
customers with SYSTEMS sales and technical support for charge or no charge to
POLYCHROME depending upon the nature of services specified below.  Whether for
charge or no charge, PRINTWARE will use best efforts to provide these SERVICES
in a timely and quality manner when requested by POLYCHROME. 


                                       7

<PAGE>

6.2  No Charge Services
POLYCHROME shall require SERVICES throughout the continental United States from
PRINTWARE during the initial Term of this Agreement and the price of SYSTEMS
sold to POLYCHROME in the continental United States already includes the cost of
the following SERVICES:

     1)   PRODUCT lead qualification training for POLYCHROME's sales
          organization.

     2)   The marketing and selling of SYSTEMS (except consumable supplies) to
          customer leads provided by POLYCHROME.

     3)   Achieving SYSTEM acceptance by the end user.

     4)   Providing computer software support.

     5)   On-site warranty services.

In the continental United States, upon ninety (90) days' notice, POLYCHROME may
elect not to use the above listed SERVICES (other than warranty services) from
PRINTWARE and PRINTWARE will reduce prices for SYSTEMS sold to POLYCHROME to the
same prices as sold to Polychrome Europe.  However, any POLYCHROME order placed
for a customer which had, within the prior one hundred and twenty (120) days,
received a SYSTEM proposal (prepared with PRINTWARE assistance as contemplated
above) will be sold at the price that includes the above-listed SERVICES. 
Otherwise, all orders placed will be billed at the price in effect at the time
of order.  If, at a later date, POLYCHROME again requests PRINTWARE to provide
such SERVICES, then PRINTWARE will provide these SERVICES on a quality and
timely basis and charge POLYCHROME at the then published rates (which shall be
reasonably based upon PRINTWARE's current rates, attached hereto as SCHEDULE
6.1) or on a time and materials basis.


                                       8

<PAGE>

In Europe, POLYCHROME will not require PRINTWARE's SERVICES (other than 
warranty services).  PRODUCT prices from PRINTWARE to POLYCHROME in these 
territories will not include SERVICES costs. If POLYCHROME requests PRINTWARE 
to provide SERVICES, then PRINTWARE will provide these SERVICES on a timely 
and quality basis and charge POLYCHROME at the then published rates (which 
shall be reasonably based upon PRINTWARE's current rates, attached hereto as 
SCHEDULE 6.1), including reasonable expenses of travel from the United States 
as necessary.

6.3  It is expressly agreed that in performing SERVICES, PRINTWARE will be
acting as POLYCHROME's limited agent as directly related to the provision of
SERVICES hereunder.  In performing SERVICES, PRINTWARE shall conduct itself as
POLYCHROME's fiduciary with regard to customer relations and sensitive
commercial information.

7.0  ADDITIONAL DUTIES OF THE PARTIES

7.1  Each party further agrees to the following:

     a)   To make available to the other at no charge, in the United States
training for technical support and applications sufficient to foster and promote
sales and service of the SYSTEMS.  However, the party requiring training will
pay for all travel and living expenses incurred by its designated trainees.

     b)   To supply to the other, at no charge, a reasonable amount of sales and
technical support literature in English for all PRODUCTS sold.

     c)   To advise the other party promptly of any modifications or
improvements to the PRODUCTS and offer them to such other party.  The supplying
party agrees that any such


                                       9

<PAGE>

modifications or improvements shall not be installed into PRODUCTS sold to 
the ordering party without written consent by the latter, which consent shall 
not be unreasonably withheld.

     d)   As to equipment, to stock and supply spare parts, accessories, options
and supplies for the PRODUCTS sold by it to the other party during the TERM, any
renewals thereof, and for five (5) years after any individual PRODUCT is
discontinued, whichever occurs first, at prices discounted at least 30% from the
then current price list, which is to be provided no later than July 1, 1991. 
Spare parts for PRODUCTS shall be shipped, subject to availability, within two
(2) weeks after receipt of order and shall not be subject to any quantity
limitations.  Each party intends to stock spare parts adequate to meet routine
needs of its customers, but the supplying party shall ship emergency orders for
spare parts to locations designated by the requesting party by the most
expeditious method by 5:00 P.M. of its local time the day following receipt of
the emergency order.

     e)   As to consumables (including plates and chemistry), to provide (itself
or through a suitable alternative supplier) a continuing supply for five (5)
years from the expiration of this Agreement.

     f)   To advertise and otherwise promote the SYSTEMS at its own expense to
an extent determined in its sole discretion.

     g)   To market the PRODUCTS under its own trade name or trademark and not
to use any trade name, trademark and/or logo of the other party or any which may
be considered confusingly similar to those used by such other party.  If a party
requests the other to label PRODUCTS, packaging or any other material for such
requesting party's benefit, the requesting


                                       10

<PAGE>

party shall indemnify and hold the other party harmless from any and all 
infringement claims, losses or liabilities arising therefrom.

     h)   To comply with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the
sale, use, packaging and labeling of the PRODUCTS, including, but not limited to
those related to OSHA, Right to Know legislation, and export/import of goods,
with the cooperation of the other party as set out herein.  All taxes, duties,
fees, insurance and like costs incurred in connection with the sale of PRODUCTS
under this Agreement, shall be for the purchasing party's account.

8.0  WARRANTY

8.1  Each party warrants that the PRODUCTS shall conform to the specifications
attached hereto as SCHEDULE 8.1 ("SPECIFICATIONS") and shall be free from
defects in materials or workmanship (a) as to hardware, for ninety (90) days
from installation, (but in no event more than two hundred and seventy (270) days
from the date of shipment), and (b), as to consumables, for twelve (12) months
from date of shipment.  Each party disclaims all other warranties, express or
implied, including the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a
particular purpose.  Warranty will be further subject to the condition that the
PRODUCTS have not been modified or altered without approval of the supplying
party and have been stored, maintained and used with the appropriate processing
equipment and chemistry as directed by the supplying party.  A party's sole
obligation on account of breach of warranty is to replace or repair defective
PRODUCT, or at its discretion to issue a credit for same.  The providing party
retains the right to inspect any PRODUCT alleged to be defective.  In no event
shall either party be liable for any damages, whether direct, indirect,
incidental or consequential.


                                       11

<PAGE>

9.0  PROPRIETARY RIGHTS INDEMNITY

9.1  Each party shall defend (at its expense) and indemnify the other in any and
all suits brought by any third party for infringement of any proprietary right
by reason of any PRODUCT furnished under this Agreement and its use, unless such
infringement is caused by unauthorized modification of same by the receiving
party.  Each party shall notify the other promptly of any notice of claim of
infringement and the manufacturing party shall have sole control of the defense
of any action on such claim and all negotiations for its settlement or
compromise.  Each party shall reasonably cooperate in the defense of any alleged
infringement as reasonably requested by the other.  Neither party shall be
responsible for any costs, expenses or compromises made without the allegedly
infringing party's prior written consent.  Obligations under this section shall
survive this Agreement.

10.0 DISTRIBUTION

10.1 In partial consideration of contributions to the development of the
SYSTEMS, including the provision of input of a confidential and proprietary
nature, the fiduciary elements of this Agreement, and POLYCHROME's substantial
investment in building a market for the SYSTEMS in the continental United States
and Europe, PRINTWARE shall manufacture SYSTEMS as an OEM (private label)
exclusively for POLYCHROME among metal lithographic plate manufacturers and
POLYCHROME agrees to purchase its requirements for SYSTEMS exclusively from
PRINTWARE.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, PRINTWARE reserves the right to sell
SYSTEMS under its own label directly, as an OEM (other than as qualified above)
and through dealer/distributors.


                                       12

<PAGE>

10.2 The OEM exclusivity set forth in Section 10.1 is further conditioned upon
POLYCHROME's purchase of a minimum of seventy-five (75) SYSTEMS during the
initial two-year term of this Agreement.  Loss of exclusivity shall be
POLYCHROME's only liability for failure to meet such minimum.

11.0 NEW PRODUCTS, TECHNOLOGY, AND RIGHT TO MANUFACTURE
In consideration of the close cooperation of the parties in developing the
SYSTEMS, the valuable resources each has expended in such development efforts,
the mutual interest in fostering future developments, and the anticipated
commercial value of same, the parties specifically agree as follows: 

11.1 All information disclosed or generated during the course of SYSTEMS
development will be deemed to be CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION as defined under
Section 1.4 of this Agreement.

11.2 In the event the active collaboration of the parties generates patentable
subject matter, the parties will cooperate in preparation and prosecution of a
patent application (including execution of assignments of rights to each party
equally) and will share expenses equally.  However, if one party chooses not to
pursue any application for patent, the other may proceed at its sole expense and
retain sole title, right and interest thereto, but nothing shall relieve either
party of its duty to cooperate in good faith with the other in the
application/prosecution process.

11.3 Any additional PRODUCTS developed as a result of mutual cooperation may be
added to the list of PRODUCTS and shall be sold and bought under this Agreement
for prices to be negotiated in good faith.


                                       13

<PAGE>

11.4 Unless otherwise agreed, each party will bear its own development expenses.

11.5 In the event this Agreement is terminated by POLYCHROME pursuant to Section
13.1 (A) or (B) or PRINTWARE elects to cease manufacturing any PRODUCT,
PRINTWARE shall offer to POLYCHROME the right of first refusal in all
proprietary rights to such PRODUCT (including trade secrets, patents, licenses
or other entitlement) necessary or desirable to make, have made, use and sell
such PRODUCT on mutually agreeable terms and conditions to be negotiated in good
faith.  In the event this Agreement is terminated by PRINTWARE pursuant to
Section 13.1(A) or (B), POLYCHROME shall provide to PRINTWARE full authority and
information adequate for PRINTWARE to approach POLYCHROME's vendors to directly
source as an OEM any PRODUCT plate processing equipment, chemistry or supplies.

12.0 EXCLUSIVITY

12.1 In consideration of past and future contributions to development of the
SYSTEMS, the fiduciary elements of this Agreement, and POLYCHROME's substantial
investment in building a market for the SYSTEMS, PRINTWARE agrees that during
the TERM or any renewal thereof, (a) it will purchase all of its requirements
for OPC plates, plate processing equipment and plate processing chemistry from
POLYCHROME, and (b) it will not enter into any OPC sensitized material or metal
plate procurement relationship with any entity that manufactures, markets or
sells printing plates, plate processing equipment or chemistry.  If POLYCHROME
is unable to achieve a selling price to PRINTWARE of 41% off the then-current
list price per foot for OPC-D plates by January 1, 1992, PRINTWARE may thereupon
seek to purchase (only) such plates from


                                       14

<PAGE>

third parties (and, in such case, POLYCHROME may also purchase its 
requirements pursuant to Paragraph 12.2 from third parties as well).


12.2 In consideration of past and future contribution to the development of
SYSTEMS (including the Models 1440 ES and MP platesetters, the Model 1440 MP
ZipRip raster image processor and associated consumables), the fiduciary
elements of this Agreement and PRINTWARE's substantial investment in SYSTEMS and
market development, during the TERM of this Agreement and any renewal thereof,
POLYCHROME agrees to purchase all its requirements for digital laser platemakers
meeting the specific description in Schedule 1.2 from PRINTWARE.  During the
initial two-year TERM of this Agreement only, POLYCHROME agrees to purchase all
its requirements for related IR-sensitive zinc oxide paper plates from
PRINTWARE.

13.0 TERMINATION

13.1 PRINTWARE or POLYCHROME will have the right to immediately
terminate this Agreement and/or any Purchase Orders hereunder if the other
party:

A)   makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or a receiver, trustee in
bankruptcy or similar officer is appointed to take charge of all or part of its
property, and/or is adjudged bankrupt, or

B)   neglects or fails to perform or observe any existing or future material
obligations(s) to the other party (including failure to meet SPECIFICATIONS and
late delivery by more than 30 days) under this Agreement, and such condition(s)
is not remedied within thirty (30) days after written notice thereof has been
given particularizing the default.


                                       15

<PAGE>

13.2 Upon the termination of this Agreement each party shall promptly deliver to
the other all price lists, information, brochures and such other pertinent
documentation of the PRODUCTS or the requirements of customers as it may
possess. 

13.3 Neither party shall use or disclose to any other person CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION for a period of five (5) years from the termination of this
AGREEMENT.

14.0 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

14.1 The waiver by either party of a breach of this Agreement by the other shall
not be deemed to be a waiver of any subsequent breach.

14.2 PRINTWARE and POLYCHROME each shall act as principals in all respects
concerning this Agreement and neither of them shall hold itself out as the agent
of the other, except as otherwise provided herein.  Each party shall keep the
other free from all expenses and costs other than those that may be specifically
authorized by the other in writing.

14.3 All notices and requests required or authorized hereunder shall be given in
writing either by personal delivery to the party to whom notice is to be given,
or by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, or by confirmed
facsimile or telex and the date upon which any such notice is received shall be
deemed to be the date of such notice, irrespective of the date appearing
therein.  Each notice shall be addressed as follows (or to such other address as
either party may designate pursuant to this paragraph):


                                       16

<PAGE>
                                If to POLYCHROME:

POLYCHROME CORPORATION
137 Alexander Street
Yonkers, New York 10702
Attn: William R. Palafox
Director, Imaging Systems

                                If to PRINTWARE:

PRINTWARE, INC.
1385 Mendota Heights Road
St. Paul, Minnesota 55120
Attn:  Daniel A. Baker

14.4 In any action by either party to collect the purchase price of the PRODUCTS
or to otherwise enforce any provision of this Agreement, the prevailing party
shall be entitled to reimbursement of its reasonable attorneys' fees.  Under no
circumstances shall either party be liable for consequential damages. 

14.5 This Agreement shall be governed by, and for all purposes be construed and
deemed to be a contract made under and pursuant to, the laws of the State of
Minnesota (without giving effect to any choice of law provisions thereunder). 

14.6 If any provision hereof shall be determined to be illegal or unenforceable,
the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall not be affected thereby and
shall remain in full force and effect. 

14.7 Each party hereto shall be relieved of its obligations hereunder to the
extent that fulfillment of such obligations shall be prevented by any occurrence
beyond the reasonable control of the party affected thereby.

14.8 The captions and headings set forth herein are for convenience and
reference only.


                                       17

<PAGE>

14.9 Neither party shall assign this Agreement or any rights or obligations
hereunder without the prior written consent (which consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld in the case of a requested assignment to an affiliate or
subsidiary or to a purchaser or transferee of all or substantially all of the
assets of a party) of the other and any attempt to do so will be null and void.

14.10 This Agreement, including the Schedules attached hereto, contains the
entire agreement between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof
and may be changed only by written amendment signed by the parties.  Any prior
understandings and agreements between the parties are merged herein.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the
date first written above.

PRINTWARE, INC.                         POLYCHROME CORPORATION


By:   /s/ D. V. Mager                   By:   /s/ Donald O. Wheeler         
   ----------------------------------      ---------------------------------

Title:   President                      Title:   President
      -------------------------------         ------------------------------


                                       18

<PAGE>
                                  SCHEDULE 1.2
                       POLYCHROME PRICE LIST TO PRINTWARE
                                 April 15, 1991

POLYCHROME CONSUMABLES:

1. OPC-D ALUMINUM PRINTING PLATES (1 ROLL/CARTON):

   -  Specially formulated laser-exposable printing plates on .150mm thick
      graphic arts quality aluminum substrate.  Capable of 50,000 copy run
      lengths.

         - Roll sizes:
            -9-3/8"     x  147 feet
            -10"        x  147 feet
            -11"        x  147 feet
            -13-3/8"    x  147 feet
            -14-1/2"    x  147 feet
            -15"        x  147 feet
            -15-1/2"    x  147 feet
            -16"        x  147 feet

   - Additional sizes available on request.  20 roll minimum order required.


                                               OEM     LIST    OEM
                                               USA     USA     EUROPE
                                               ---     ----    ------
                                              (US $)           (BRITISH
                                                               POUNDS
                                                               STERLING)

     - Per square foot of roll plate material. .[**] . 1.80
     - Per square meter of roll plate material . . . . . . . . .[**] 

2. OPC-D ALUMINUM PRINTING PLATES (CUT SHEETS, 50 PLATES/PACKAGE):

   -  Specifically formulated laser-exposable printing plates on graphic arts
      quality aluminum substrate.
      - Up to 50,000 run length for 0.150mm thickness.
      - Up to 100,000 for greater thickness.

                                               OEM     LIST    OEM
                                               USA     USA     EUROPE
                                               ---     ----    ------
                                              (US $)           (BRITISH
                                                               POUNDS
                                                               STERLING)

     - 0.150mm thickness
          - Per quare foot . . . . . . . . . . [**] .  1.70
          - Per square meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [**]
     - 0.200mm thickness
          - Per square foot. . . . . . . . . . [**] .  1.75
          - Per square meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [**]
     - 0.300mm thickness
          - Per square foot. . . . . . . . . . [**] .  1.78
          - Per square meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [**]
   
- -------------------
Brackets with asterisks correspond to deleted text that is subject to a 
confidential treatment request filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 406.
    

                                 CONFIDENTIAL                         1
<PAGE>

POLYCHROME CONSUMABLES (CONTINUED):

                                               OEM     LIST    OEM
                                               USA     USA     EUROPE
                                               ---     ----    ------
                                              (US $)           (BRITISH
                                                               POUNDS
                                                               STERLING)
3. OPC-D LIQUID TONER CONCENTRATE
      - Liter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  85.50.  120.00 .  49.36
      - 1/2 Liter bottle . . . . . . . . . .  42.75.  60.00

4. OPC-D LIQUID TONER DILUTED 30:1
      - Case (6 x 1 qt). . . . . . . . . . .  33.84.  56.40
      - 5 Litre containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  16.35

5. OPC-D DEVELOPER
      - 5 gallon cubitainer. . . . . . . . .  42.00.  84.93
      - 5 Litre containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  5.75

6. POLYCHROME FINISHING GUM
      - Gallon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  14.18.  26.93
      - 5 Litre containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  6.50

POLYCHROME EQUIPMENT:
                                               OEM     LIST    OEM
                                               USA     USA     EUROPE
                                               ---     ----    ------
                                              (US $)           (BRITISH
                                                               POUNDS
                                                               STERLING)
1. OPC 450 TABLETOP PLATE PROCESSOR:

   -  Specially designed for Polychrome's OPC plates.  Develop, wash, gum, dry
      functions.
        - Thermostatically-controlled developer heater.
        - Variable speed control, manual start/stop.
        - With delivery table and stand.
                                               [**] .  8,738. .[**]

2. OPC 450 PLATE PROCESSOR OPTIONS:

   -  Converts 450 tabletop processor to upright model
        - Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  205. .  275. .  95
        - Delivery Table . . . . . . . . . . .  121. .  162. .  56

3. OPC 450 "SUPER" PLATE PROCESSOR:

   -  Deluxe version of 450 model.  Additional features include:  plate
      transport system auto sensor start-up, auto stop at end of plate
      developing cycle, auto developer and gum replenishment, stand and
      delivery table.

                                               [**] .  10,709  [**]

4. OPC 450 PLATE PROCESSOR SPARE PARTS:

   -  Pending


   
- -------------------
Brackets with asterisks correspond to deleted text that is subject to a 
confidential treatment request filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 406.
    
                                 CONFIDENTIAL                         2
<PAGE>

                                                        JOINT
                                                     U.S. SALES       OEM
                                                     ----------       ---
1440 MP PLATESETTER-ZIPRIP SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . .  $[**]        $[**]

   1440 MP PLATESETTER - 220V.
      System includes:
        -  Computer-to-metal-printing-plate imaging
           capability for 1st-generation output
        -  1200x1200 dpi resolution
        -  98 pica maximum plate width
        -  90 pica maximum imageable region
        -  Variable imaging length
        -  40" per minute imaging speed
        -  Compatible with 1440 MP Plate media
        -  120 lip halftone capability
        -  Liquid toner technology
        -  Operator key-pad with on-line diagnostics
        -  Automatic media cutter
        -  1440 MP ZipRip

1440 MP PLATESETTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    $[**]      $[**]
1440 MP ZIPRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  $19,995    $12,995

1440 ZIPRIP-TM- OPTIONS

   Hard Disk Drives
      - 105 MB hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $1,350       $880
      - 210 MB hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $2,225     $1,445
   Internal Memory Upgrades
      - 4 MB RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $1,500       $975
      - 16 MB RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $6,000     $3,900

1440 MP PRODUCT OPTIONS

   Choice of one interpreter:
      - Printstyle-TM- (PostScript-Registered 
        Trademark- compatible). . . . . . . . . . . . .    $N/C       $N/C
      - Printset-TM- (Printware native command set) . .    $N/C       $N/C
      - Autologic-Registered Trademark- ICL subset. . .  $1,000       $650
   Automatic Converter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    $695       $550
      - Automatic converter used to convert (etch) 
        1440 Zinc Oxide Plates 
   Optical Mastering System (on-line storage of data; 
   high-speed access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $19,040    $12,375
      - IBM-PS/2 model 30 Mastering Host, keyboard, 
        monitor, SCSI cable, Printware optical master 
        software, documentation 
      - Optical Mastering Station: 2-400MB WORM disk 
        drives, 20MB hard disk
   Mass Storage Options:
      - 800MB Optical Disk Drive (WORM), 400MB on-line 
        per side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  $5,000     $3,250
      - 800MB Optical Disk Media (400MB per side) . . .    $150       $120
   Diagnostics Option:
      - 1440 Information Terminal for diagnostic 
        information and operational status of 1440 
        Platesetter/Image Processor . . . . . . . . . .    $550       $385
   1440 Platesetter Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .    $790       $555
      - Sturdy stand designed to hold the 1440 Platesetter.

   
- -------------------
Brackets with asterisks correspond to deleted text that is subject to a 
confidential treatment request filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 406.
    

                                 CONFIDENTIAL                         3
<PAGE>

PRINTWARE CONSUMABLES                                                  OEM
                                                                       ---

   1440 Toner (6 x 1 qt.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $58/box
   1440 Dispersant (6 x 1 qt.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $25/box
   1440 Conversion/Fountain Solution Concentrate
      - 4 x 1 concen. gallon/box--mixes 5 liquid gallons 
        per 1 dry gallon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  $280/box
      - 4 x 1 quart/box--mixes 1 liquid gallon in each 
        container provided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $69/box
   1440 Non-ferrocyanide Fountain Solution Concentrate for 
        magnetic ink users 
      - 4 x 1 concen. gallon/box--mixes 10 liquid gallons 
        per 1 dry gallon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $69/box
   1440 Standard Zinc Oxide Plates (2 rolls/carton):
      - 8" x 400 feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $[**]/roll
      - 9" x 400 feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  [**]/roll
      - 10" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  [**]/roll
      - 11" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  [**]/roll
      - 12" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  [**]/roll
      - 12-9/16" x 400 feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  [**]/roll
      - 15" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  [**]/roll
      - additional sizes available upon request
   1440 Premium Zinc Oxide Plates (2 rolls/carton):
      - Specially formulated laser plates developed for 
        long-run use with the 1440.
      Premium plates offer up to 10,000 run length.
      - 8" x 400 feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  $[**]/roll
      - 9" x 400 feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   [**]/roll
      - 10" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   [**]/roll
      - 11" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   [**]/roll
      - 12" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   [**]/roll
      - 14-9/16" x 400 feet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   [**]/roll
      - 15" x 400 feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   [**]/roll
      - additional sizes available upon request

                                                     JOINT
                                                   U.S. SALES            OEM
                                                   ----------            ---
PRINTWARE TYPEFACE LIBRARY

   Downloadable typeface packages (4 typefaces/package):
   SPECIFY MAC OR DOS
      1 - 5 packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $149/pkg.       $105/pkg.
      6 - 10 packages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $139/pkg.        $97/pkg.
      11 - 24 packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $129/pkg.        $90/pkg.
      25 - 49 packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $119/pkg.        $83/pkg.
      50 and up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   $109/pkg.        $76/pkg.

   FontHelper Installation Kit - PC Screen Font 
   Generation Program
      - Microsoft Windows or Xerox Ventura
        Publisher versions - please specify. .  . .   $50/each        $35/each

   Using fonts in multi-host environments:
      - 35 RESIDENT SCREEN FONTS: for Macintosh 
        users only  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .       $125             $90
      - MAC: screen fonts for downloadable 
        typeface packages*. . . . . . . . . . . .$50/first pkg   $35/first pkg
      - PC: character width tables for 
        downloadable typeface packages.*. . . . .$25/add'l pkg   $18/add'l pkg

   FontHelper Installation Kit needed to create PC screen fonts (same order)
   * SCREEN FONTS/CHARACTER WIDTH TABLES CAN ONLY BE PURCHASED WITH
     CORRESPONDING LIBRARY FONT PURCHASE

   
- -------------------
Brackets with asterisks correspond to deleted text that is subject to a 
confidential treatment request filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 406.
    

                                 CONFIDENTIAL                         4
<PAGE>

                                  SCHEDULE 1.2
                              PRINTWARE PRICE LIST
                                 April 15, 1991

PLAIN PAPER LASER PRINTERS:                               JOINT
                                                        U.S. SALES      OEM
                                                        ----------      ---
720 IQ PROFESSIONAL II SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . .   $13,990     $9,095
   STANDARD CONFIG.: 720 IQ Laser Imager (1200x600 
                     dpi plain paper laser imager)
                     720 IQ ZipRip-TM-
                       -  4 MB memory
                       -  68030 microprocessor
                       -  Printstyle interpreter
                       -  20 MB hard disk with 35 
                          resident typefaces
                       -  Type 1 and Type 3 compatible
                       -  Diskette back-up of 35 
                          resident typefaces (choice of 
                          Mac or DOS media format)
                       -  Serial interface
                       -  Centronics parallel interface
                       -  AppleTalk (for Macintosh 
                          connectivity)

   OPTIONS:          Memory - 4 MB increments. . . . .      $990       $645
                     Hard Disk:
                       -  40 MB hard drive . . . . . .      $825       $540
                       -  105 MB hard drive. . . . . .    $1,350       $880
                       -  210 MB hard drive. . . . . .    $2,225     $1,445

CONSUMABLES
                     Color Toner Station . . . . . . .      $250       $175
                        Red, Blue, or Brown
                     Toner:
                       - Black (4x250g). . . . . . . .      $225       $145
                       - Red (4x50g) . . . . . . . . .       $32        $21
                       - Blue (4x50g). . . . . . . . .       $32        $21
                       - Brown (4x50g) . . . . . . . .       $32        $21

DISCOUNTS FOR VOLUME PURCHASE (EXCLUDES CONSUMABLES)       JOINT
                                                         U.S. SALES     OEM
                                                         ----------     ---
Equipment Per End User - 4 to 10 systems delivered 
  within 9 months of the first shipment                       5%         --

Quantity 1440 systems delivered first contract 
  year:   25 - 74                                             --        12%
          75 - 99                                             --        20%
          100 +                                               --        23%

Quantity 1440 systems delivered second contract 
  year:   25 - 74                                             --        12%
          75 - 99                                             --        20%
          100 +                                               --        23%

            PRINTWARE, INC.                      POLYCHROME CORPORATION

By     ______________________________   By     _______________________________
Title  ______________________________   Title  _______________________________
Date   ______________________________   Date   _______________________________



                                 CONFIDENTIAL                         5
<PAGE>

                                  SCHEDULE 6.1

                          1991 STANDARD SERVICES RATES




          1.   Customer Support Services
               -    Service Technician
               -    Hardware or Software Support Specialist

               Rates
               -----

               Labor               $95 per hour

               Travel time         $50 per hour

               Plus travel expenses and materials

          2.   System Engineering Services

               -    Prospect's systems analysis
               -    Technical system proposal generation
               -    Post-sales system integration and acceptance

               Rates
               -----

               Labor               $125 per hour

               Travel time         $65 per hour

               Plus travel expenses and materials

<PAGE>


                                                          APPENDIX II - 12-17-90

                         POLYCHROME TONER SPECIFICATION



TONER

          % Solid               10%
          Storage Temperature   Room Temperature (store in a cool dry place)
          Dilution              TBD
          Diluent               Isopar H
          Operating Temp.       Below 100DEG. F
          Shelf Life            1 year
          Fusing Temperature    120DEG. C

<PAGE>

                                  SCHEDULE 8.1

                                 SPECIFICATIONS






                          ORGANIC PHOTOCONDUCTOR (OPC)
                      ELECTROSTATIC ALUMINUM PLATE MATERIAL




                              CONFIDENTIAL MATERIAL
                        NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT REQUIRED




<PAGE>
   

                          ORGANIC PHOTOCONDUCTOR (OPC)
                      ELECTROSTATIC ALUMINUM PLATE MATERIAL

1.0  SCOPE

This document establishes the requirements for the lithographic printing plate
to be used in the Printware Model 1440 MP Platemaker.

A lithographic Electrostatic aluminum printing plate consists of an offset
aluminum base and an electrophotographic layer.  It is to be imaged in the
Printware Model 1440 MP Platemaker in the following sequence:

     Charging                 
     Exposure                 
     Liquid electrostatic toner development
     Fusing of toner (heat)   

This printing plate will be run on commercially available manual and automatic
offset presses.

For the purpose of periodic audits, characterization and qualification,
evaluations shall be made to the limits of this document and specified reference
documents.

Specified values within this specification without tolerances shall be
considered as nominal values.

Subsequent to imaging on the Platemaker, the plate will undergo a plate
processing which includes decoating, water rinse and coating with protective
gum, all by machine or hand.

3.0  REQUIREMENTS

3.1 Physical
Configuration - Rolls
Width of roll:
          Roll Width                         Rolls per Box
          ----------                         -------------
          12 inch                                  1
          TBD inch                                 1
          16 inch                                  1
Winding - Light sensitive or coated side out
Length - TBD.
Roll Diameter - Not to exceed 7.625 inches.
Core Diameter - 6'' I.D.
Core Width - Roll width + or - 1/64 inch.
Weight - TBD.
Caliper - 5.5 mls.

                                       2
    
<PAGE>
   

                         ORGANIC PHOTOCONDUCTOR (OPC)
                    ELECTROSTATIC ALUMINUM  PLATE MATERIAL

3.2 MECHANICAL

3.2.1     Plate must be machine compatible with the Printware Model 1440 MP
Platesetter and standard plate processing equipment.

3.2.2     Plate must be acceptable to handling under normal press operating
conditions.

3.2.3     Plate must work with conventional acid fountain solutions.

3.3  ELECTRICAL

3.3.1     Exposure Sensitivity: Panchromatic.

3.3.2     Charge acceptance:  35OV.

3.3.3     [**]

3.3.4     Laser light decay:  1 - 2 micro Joule/cm.

3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL

Electrostatic Aluminum Plate Material shall be capable of meeting all functional
and performance requirements of this specification when operated within the
combined environments shown without requiring any adjustments.

            AMBIENT TEMP.    RELATIVE HUMIDITY      ALTITUDE
            -------------    -----------------     ----------
Storage      65 to 75 F.         40% to 50%        0-8,200 Ft
Operating    50 to 90 F.         30% to 70%        0-8,200 Ft
Transport   -40 to 122 F.         0% to 99%        0-40,000 Ft

Store in a cool, dry place in original packaging.









- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 
406.

                                       3
    


<PAGE>
   
                         Organic Photoconductor (OPC)
                     ELECTROSTATIC ALUMINUM PLATE MATERIAL

3.5  PERFORMANCE

3.5.1     The plate shall perform as a lithographic printing plate.

3.5.2     [**]
        - [**]

        - [**]

        - [**]
        - [**]
        - [**]

3.5.3     [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     - [**]
3.5.4     [**]

3.5.5     Stretch - around press cylinder, less than TBD at TBD impressions.
3.5.6     Daylight Operation - The operation of the plate shall not be
          affected by normal room light either before, during or after imaging.
3.5.7     Shelf life - 12 months. 

5.0  SHIPPING AND HANDLING - TBD

Preparation for delivery shall include unit packaging capable of protecting the
unit when shipped using a commercial common carrier.  PRINTWARE reserves the
right to test packaging to National Safe Transit Association (NSTA) to verify
compliance.

Pallet size - TBD.

Artwork master for box label to be approved by Printware, Inc. (See Figure 1.)

6.0  DESIGN OR PROCESS CHANGES
     None.

- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       4
    

<PAGE>

   

                         ORGANIC PHOTOCONDUCTOR (OPC)
                         ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL


7.    APPROVED VENDOR LIST

Polychrome Corporation
137 Alexander Street
Yonkers, New York 10702

                                       5
    

<PAGE>

   


                                OPC 450 DECOATER

                                 SPECIFICATION

Application:
          Processing OPC-F and OPC-D metal plates.

Functions:
          Decoat, wash, gum and dry plates to press ready conditions.

Procedure:
          Decoater bath "dip tank".
          Dwell time 35 seconds
          Squeegee Section

          Plumbed in wash section with single brush roller, (can be closed loop
          with tank fitted), plus drainage.

          Squeegee Rollers

          Gum Section
          
          Dryer - delivers press ready plate

Plate Sizes:
          Maximum width 43cm - 17in
          Minimum length 34cm - 13 1/2 in

Thickness:     0.15mm - (.006'') 0.30 (.12'')

Tank Capacities:
          Developer 16 litres
          Gum 1.5 litres

Throughput Speed:
          Variable .3 to 2.2 metres per min
               1 - 7 feet per min
          Normal setting: Speed 4 (90cm or 3 feet/min)

Temperature Control:

          The Decoater solution is thermostatically controlled at a pre-set
          optimum of 22 C - 72 F.

                                       6
    

<PAGE>

   

Supplies: POWER-Standard 240v 5OHz 13amps single phase from a mains
          isolator.  Upon request: to suit mains supply in the country of use -
          USA - 220v 60HZ

          WATER-    Input: 15mm copper inlet 5/8''
                    Outlet:21mm waste 13/16''

Weight:   100 Kgs


                                       7
    

<PAGE>

   





               [DRAWING DEPICTING OPC MODEL EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS]


A = 1600   D = 200
B =  720   E = 510
C = 1000                 DIMENSIONS - m.m.



                   FIGURE 2. OPC MODEL - EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

                                       8
    

<PAGE>

   

                RECOMMENDED OPC 450 SPARE STOCKS (30 MACHINES)

                                                      $                  $
                                                     List               DEM
QTY          DESCRIPTION             PART #          (USA)             (USA)

30           20 mm x 1A Fuse         041029            1.81             [**]
30           20 mm x 2A Fuse         041037            1.81             [**]
30           20 mm x 3A Fuse         040134            0.00             [**]
30           20 mm x 5A Fuse         041039            1.81             [**]
10           Huco Spider             050113            7.10             [**]
 6           Funnel                  050036            8.54             [**]
15           3/32 Allen Key                                                 
 3           Motor SD11              040486          635.51             [**]
 5           Tank heater (9" long)   040300          103.19             [**]
 5           Mears Thermostat        040053          131.58             [**]
 3           Speed Control PCB       041018          481.29             [**]
 5           Scrub Motor             040085          335.74             [**]
 5           Float Switch            040124           58.74             [**]
15           Bearing Block (top)     600303           15.26             [**]
15           Bearing Block (bottom)  600304           15.26             [**]
30           Bush                    050052           14.57             [**]
15           Huco Copier             050067           31.02             [**]
 2           Drive Roller  (top)     570303          235.70             [**]
 2           Drive Roller  (bottom)  570304          235.70             [**]
20           S                       070164           23.52             [**]
30           Cable Tie               040035            0.37             [**]
 6           Compression Spring      050024            4.32             [**]
 6           Flange Bearing          050037           62.73             [**]
 3           Plate Bearing           050010           49.74             [**]
33           Chain                   050014           19.35             [**]
15           Segmented Rollers       100218            4.04             [**]
 3           Segmented Roller Shaft  570172           17.68             [**]
10           Safi Top 1/2"           060019           24.22             [**]
 6           1012 Circulation Pump   040021          154.97             [**]
 3           Dryer Fan 12"           041040          220.30             [**]
 6           Relay 8 Pin             041001           50.81             [**]
10           Adaptor 1/2" Safi Tap   060029            9.70             [**]
10           Coupling 1/2" Safi Tap  060113            7.10             [**]

- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406. 

                                       9
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date 8/15/90 
                                        Page  




                            1440 MP PLATESETTER

                         SPECIFICATION NUMBER 700201







                        PRINTWARE, INC. CONFIDENTIAL

ORIGINATOR                ENGINEERING             QUALITY


                                       10
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



                              REVISION HISTORY

- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
| REV. | ECO    |                                    |         |       |
| NO.  | NO.    |      REVISION DESCRIPTION          | DATE    | APP'D |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------



                                       11
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page

1.0  SCOPE

This document establishes the requirements for the Printware model 1440 MP
platesetter.  It contains detailed information on the units performance and a
functional description of each major subsystem.  Data concerning physical
characteristics, reliability, maintainability, and environmental requirements is
also provided.

The platesetter shall be capable of full text, graphics, and halftone printing. 
For purposes of periodic audits, characterization, and qualification,
evaluations shall be made to the limits of this document and specified reference
documents.

Test methods shall be based on agreed upon procedures.

Specified values within this specification without
tolerances shall be regarded as nominal values.


     1.1  Product Description

     The 1440 MP platesetter shall image a lithographic, electrostatic printing
     plate (paper and metal) from electronic data files via a controller and
     raster scan video interface.  This direct to plate process eliminates
     costly preplate film and camera work.  The laser imaging, electrostatic
     platesetter shall be designed for use in a wide range of printing
     operations requiring quick response, high volume output.  The 1440 MP shall
     be designed to operate reliably in the heavy-duty cycle environments in
     which high volume platesetters typically perform.  Figure 1.1 shows the
     dimensions of the platesetter.

     The platesetter shall use roll fed paper and metal plate material and sheet
     fed metal plate material with widths from 8 inches to 16 inches.  Plate
     exposure shall be by a 780 nanometer wavelength laser diode at a resolution
     of 1200 dots per inch.  Imaging data shall be input via a raster scan video
     interface.

     Both plate materials shall be developed using the same liquid toner and are
     fixed and dried using a radiant heater.


                                       12
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page




The platesetter shall be a compact table top unit having outside dimensions of
35 x 29 x 19.5 inches.  Its weight shall be no more than 300 lbs when fully
loaded.

The 1440 MP platesetter shall be designed to ease operator interactions by
providing quick access to the plate material and toner unit, simple straight-
through plate feed and a built-in diagnostic display to report the status of the
platesetter's systems and media path.

1.2  Summary Characteristics

     Type:                    Tabletop, liquid toned, electrostatic, laser 
                              imaging platesetter for paper and metal plates

     Maximum plate image area:     15"

     Maximum plate size:      16" x 27"

     Minimum plate size:      8" x 12"

     Processing speed:        40" per minute (0.5"
                              minimum gap between plates)

     Image resolution         1200 dots per inch (dpi)

     Media feed:              Roll feed for paper and metal plates
                              Sheet feed for metal plates

     Registration:            [**]
                              [**]
                              [**]
                              [**]
                              [**]
                              [**]
                              [**]
                              [**]

- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406. 


                                       13
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page



     Plate length variation:       = 1/64" at 22"

     Cut sheet tolerance:          = 1/64" maximum

     Imaging:                      Raster scan video interface

     Exposure:                     Laser diode, 780 nm

     Developing:                   Liquid toner

     Toner Capacity:               6 quarts

     Fixing:                       Radiant heat with forced air

     Electrical:                   200/220/240VAC, 50/60 Hz

     Dimensions:                   35" (W) x 29" (D) x 19.5" (H)

     Weight:                       300 lbs (fully laden)

     Operating Environment:        Temperature 50  to 104  F,
                                   Humidity 30 to 80% RH non-condensing

     1.3  System Description

2.0  DOCUMENTS

     2.1  Applicable Documents

          1440 MP Platesetter Operator Manual     700XXX

          1440 MP Platesetter Service Manual      700XXX

          Laser Liquid Electrostatic Plate Material    700007

                                       14
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page


          UL Standard 775

          VDE Standard 0805, 0806

          FCC Subpart J Part 15

     2.2  Reference Documents

          MIL-STD-105D, Sampling Procedures and Tables for Inspection by
          Attributes

3.0  REQUIREMENTS

     3.1  Electrical Input Power

          3.1.1     Voltage
                    Voltage operating range shall be 185-260 VAC
          3.1.2     Frequency
                    Machine operation per specification (including print
                    quality):

                           48-62 Hz

          3.1.3     Current

          Operating Voltage        Frequency      (ID Plate Value)
          --------------------------------------------------------

          200/220/240 VAC          50/60 Hz       6 amps

                                       15
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  


          3.1.4     Power Dissipation

          Operating Voltage         Frequency          Rated Power
          --------------------------------------------------------
          200/220/240 VAC           50/60 Hz           1320 Watts

          3.1.5     Short Term Power Outage

                    Loss of power to the machine will not cause hardware
                    damage.

          3.1.6     Power Cord

                    Platesetter shall be provided with a 3-wire 7.0 ft.
                    (2.1 m) AC line cord.  Cord shall be attached to the
                    printer and provided with the plug type per the following
                    table.

                    Power Option                  Plug Type
                    ------------                  ---------

                    U.S.
                    220/240 VAC 60 Hz             CEE 7/7
                    (8XXXXX-XXX)

                    Europe
                    220 VAC 50 Hz                 CEE 7/7
                    (8XXXXX-XXX)

                    U.K.
                    240 VAC 50 Hz                 BS 1363
                    (8XXXXX-XXX)

          3.1.7     Input Overcurrent Protection

          Adequate input overcurrent protection shall be provided to
          meet the safety requirements of referenced agencies, section 3.6.


                                       16
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



          3.1.8     Caloric Output

                    The caloric output of the platesetter shall not exceed the
                    following:

                           Standby - 194 BTU/hour

                           Operating - 4500 BTU/hour

     3.2  Functional

          3.2.1     Print Rate

                    The print rate shall be 40 inches per minute or two
                    unique plates per minute of continuous operation
                    (16" x 19.5" plates).  The minimum possible gap between
                    plates shall be 0.5".

          3.2.2     Duty Cycle

                    Power On Duty Cycle

                    The platesetter shall be capable of a 100% power
                    on duty cycle.

                    Printing Duty Cycle

                    The platesetter shall be capable of imaging 960
                    plates in an 8 hour day.

          3.2.3     Imaging System


                    3.2.3.1 Image Scan Frequency

                            The raster scan shall operate at a frequency of
                            800 Hz + or - 1 Hz.



                                       17
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



          3.2.3.2 Laser

                  The laser power shall be adjusted separately for paper and
                  metal.  The platesetter will sense which type of plate
                  material is currently running and automatically select the
                  correct laser power.

                  3.2.3.2.1 Laser Head

                          The laser head shall be fully enclosed except for the
                          0.125" x 16.5" image aperture. The aperture shall be
                          visually inaccessible during operation.  A safety
                          interlock shall cut power to the laser when the
                          platesetter is opened for maintenance or repair.

                  3.2.3.2.2 Type

                          Laser Diode, 20 milliwatt

                  3.2.3.2.3 Wave Length

                          780 nanometers

                  3.2.3.2.4  Maximum Printing Zone

                          The maximum printing zone shall be 15" (381 cm) wide
                          and to within .125" of the leading and trailing edges.
                          Refer to Figure 5-2.

          3.2.4 Charging Unit

                  Charger                  Dual Corona wires

                  Charging Voltage         -3 KVDC to -6 KVDC upper 0 to 4 KVAC
                                           p-p min, 0 to 7.5 KVAC p-p max lower


                                       18
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



                    Wire thickness             100  m

                    Corona settings switch     platesetter senses whether paper
                                               or metal plate material is
                                               currently running, and internal
                                               setting switch automatically
                                               adjusts the corona voltage to
                                               the correct level for that
                                               material

                    Access                     Easily accessible for operator
                                               cleaning


          3.2.5     Developing System

                    The developer and toner particles shall be suspended in
                    an isopar-H based fluid.  Developing shall be accomplished
                    by means of the PRINTWARE even flow system.  The same toner
                    shall be used for both paper and metal plates.

                    The toner in the toner reservoir shall be adequately
                    agitated to prevent the toner particles from settling out.
                    All key components of the toner station shall be easily
                    removable for cleaning.

          3.2.6     Toner Capacity

                    The toner capacity shall be 6 quarts (5.7 litres).

          3.2.7     Fixing Station

                    Drying time         2 seconds

                    Heater              single IR quartz lamp, 1000 watt

                    Fans                4 DC brushless fans


                                       19
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



                    Control        Thermistor controlled

                    The platesetter senses which type of plate material is
                    currently running and automatically adjusts the fuser
                    duty cycle accordingly to fuse the toner evenly across
                    the plate.

          3.2.8     Electronics System

                    Microprocessor-controlled stepper motors using plate
                    path sensing feedback

                    Microprocessor-controlled laser modulation and
                    scanner functions

          3.2.9     Power Supply

                    Central drawer with switching 200 watt power supply

     3.3  Physical

          3.3.1     Dimensions
                    The platesetter shall measure 35"W x 29"D x 19.5"H
                    (88.9 cm x 73.7 cm x 49.5 cm).

          3.3.2     Recommended Installation Clearances
                    Height:        30"
                    Width:         30"
                    Depth:         10"

          Refer to Figure 3.1.

          3.3.3     Weight
     
                    The platesetter shall weigh 300 lbs (82 kg) fully laden.

                                       20
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



     3.4  Environmental

     The platesetter shall be capable of meeting all functional and reliability
     requirements of this specification when operated within the combined
     environments shown without requiring any adjustment.  No adverse or
     degrading effects shall be sustained by the printer under either the
     operating or storage/transportation environments shown.

          3.4.1     Characteristics

                    The platesetter shall be designed and manufactured to meet
                    the following EMI and environmental requirements.  While the
                    platesetter will operate under these conditions, significant
                    image degradation may occur at the extremes listed.  See
                    media specifications for optimum imaging conditions.

                    Climatic Conditions

                    Temperature (  F) Rel.  Humidity (%) (non-condensing)

                    Storage and shipping range         -40 to +150  DEG.F
                    Operating range                    +50 to +104  DEG.F
                                                       30 to 80% RH
                                                       non-condensing

                    Electromagnetic compatibility:  The equipment shall comply
                    with the requirements of:

                         -    FCC Class A Subpart J of Part 15
                         -    VDE Std. 0871 and 0875

                    Altitude - operating     0-7500 ft (0-2286 m)
                    Altitude - shipping       0-40,000 ft (0-12,190 m)

     3.5  System Safety

                                       21
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



          3.5.1     System Grounding

                    The frame and any metal parts required by safety standard
                    to be grounded shall be connected to AC frame ground.

          3.5.2     Optical Protection

                    The platesetter shall be provided with warning labels
                    indicating the presence of a laser beam.  Figure 3.2 shows
                    the system warning labels.

     3.6  Agency

          3.6.1     Listing Agency Requirements

                    The platesetter shall be listed with the following agencies
                    and be so labeled.

                    Underwriters Lab #El3l666

                    VDE #G 88040

                    FCC, Limits for Class A computing devices, Subpart J of
                    Part 15 of FCC Rules

                    CDRH, Class 1 Laser Device

                    U.S. Federal, Federal Performance Standard as projected
                    under the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
                    1968, and certification requirement of 21 CFR, Subchapter J.

                    Figure 3.3 shows the agency labels.



                                       22
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



     3.7  Warm-up

          3.7.1     Time
                    Warm-up time shall be less than 2 minutes when operated
                    within the specified environmental conditions.

          3.7.2     Procedure

                    During the power-up sequence, the platesetter shall
                    perform self-tests of its major electrical components. Upon
                    successful completion of the tests, "ON-LINE Ready=-="shall
                    be displayed on the operator control panel.

     4.0  CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

     4.1  On/Off Switch

          A switch shall be located apart from the control panel, yet convenient
          to the operator its function shall be to connect the A/C line voltage
          to the internal electronics.

     4.2  Operator Control Panel (Control Panel)

          The control panel (Figure 4-1) shall include a keypad, digital
          display, and control switches.

          4.2.1 Keypad

                 The keypad shall have two keys: a "START/YES" key and a
                 "SELECT/NO" key.

          4.2.2 Display

                  The display shall be a 16-character LED display.


                                       23
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



          4.2.3  Control Switches

                 It shall be possible to select the following functions and view
                 the following status information to the platesetter via the
                 control panel:

                 See Figure 4.2.

4.3  Print Quality Controls (Internal Panel)

     Laser Intensity - this control is analogous to the exposure control on a
     plate camera.  Its major effect is on character stroke width and background
     density.

     DC Corona  - this control regulates the amount of electrical charge the
     plate receives. its major effect is on the image density.

     AC Corona - this control also regulates the amount of electrical charge on
     the plate.  It can be thought of as a fine tuning of the charge.  Its major
     effect is on the background quality.

     Toner Bias - this control regulates a voltage between the upper and lower
     applicator plates of the toner station.  Its major effect is on background
     density although it can also affect image density to a slight degree.

     Each of these adjustments shall be made separately for metal and paper. 
     The 1440 MP will then detect which material is running and set these
     parameters accordingly.

4.4  Toner Station Adjustments

     Adjustments which can be made on the toner station are the squeegee roller
     pressure and the toner flow.

4.5  Print Counter


                                       24
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



     The platesetter shall be provided with a non-resettable plate counter read
     out from the control panel LED display.

5.0  PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

     5.1  Plate Material

          Plate material having exposure sensitivity at 780nm wavelength shall
          be used.  The paper plate material roll shall be a maximum of 400 feet
          (122 M) in length.  The metal plate material shall be a maximum of 150
          feet (45.7 M) in length.

          The flatness of metal plates shall be such that when an 18" plate is
          placed coated side up on a flat surface, no part of the plate shall be
          more than 2" above the surface.  In addition, no waviness of radius
          .5" or smaller shall be present.

     5.2  Print Quality

          Print quality within the area defined by Figure 5.1 shall conform to
          the following paragraphs.  Print Quality standards apply to new
          platesetters with new supplies and properly maintained platesetters
          immediately following scheduled preventive maintenance when new
          supplies have been installed.  The Print Quality standards apply only
          to a platesetter operating within the environmental and operational
          limits specified for the 1440 MP and the media being used.  The 1440
          MP shall conform to the specified print quality level in its entirety
          with a 95% confidence level.

          5.2.1     Image Density

                    TBD

          5.2.2     Resolution

                           5.2.2.1  Lines


                                       25
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



                            Minimum resolution on OPC metal plates shall [**].

                    5.2.2.2

                            Halftone images and tint patterns will be printed
                            at 65, 85, 100, 110 and 120 screen lines per inch.
                            The two required screen angles are 45DEG. and 90DEG.
                            A tint pattern will be a large uniform area of half
                            tone dots at a single dot spacing and a single dot
                            diameter.

                            The uniformity of halftone images will be specified
                            only for tint patterns printed with an inked plate
                            on high gloss paper.  The three types of plate
                            material (metal coils, metal plates and paper
                            plates) will be used for these test images.

                            Screen lines per inch:          65, 85, 100, 110
                                                            and 120

                            Dot percentages:                20 and 50

                            Dimensions of printed area:     8 inch square

                            The platesetter shall resolve a 120 line screen,
                            5% to 95% with uniform reproduction of the 120 line
                            screen tints.

     5.3  Plate Size

          Plate lengths shall be determined by command over the Raster Scan
          Video Interface.  Minimum plate length shall be 12 inches, maximum 27
          inches.  Plate widths shall be determined by the plate material roll
          width.  The 1440 MP platesetter shall accept any roll width from 8 to
          16 inches.  The maximum plate size is therefore 16"W x 27"L (40.6 cm x
          68.6 cm).  The minimum plate size is



- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       26
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  


          8"W x 12"L (20.3 cm x 30.5 cm).  The thickness of the metal
          plates shall be .006" (.15 mm).

     5.4  Print Size

          The laser marking mechanism shall allow a maximum image width of 15"
          (38.1 cm) with no loss of resolution or quality.  The maximum image
          length shall be 26.94" (68.4 cm).  See Figure 5.1.

     5.5  Plate Material Loading

          Accurately loading and threading rolls of plate material will be
          easily done by the operator.

          Sheets of metal plate material will be loaded using a "jogging"
          button, which allows the plate to sit in the nip of the feed rollers
          until imaging starts.  An input tray will adequately support a metal
          sheet up to 24" long.

     5.6  Plate material Output Tray

          The Platesetter shall be equipped with an output tray.  The output
          tray shall measure approximately 16.5"W x 19"L x 1"D.  Tray capacity
          shall be approximately 150 plates.

     5.7  Out-of-Plate-Material Indication

          An out-of-plate-material condition shall be indicated on the LED
          display on the control panel when the plate material roll has less
          than 65" of plate material remaining.

     5.8  Jams

          Plate material jams shall be less than 1-1000 when using the specified
          material, under specified optimum operating conditions.

                                       27
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  



     5.9  Consumables

          PRINTWARE shall market the following consumables for the 1440 MP
          Platesetter: 

               Toner, which is compatible with both media Plate material,
               including both paper and metal Conversion/Fountain solution.

     6.0  QUALITY AND RELIABILITY

     6.1  Quality

          Product design, material selection and Manufacturing workmanship shall
          be in accordance with standard industry practices.

     6.2  Inspection

          6.2.1     Requirements

                    The indicated inspection criteria shall be used to
                    determine acceptability of lot quality levels.  All
                    inspection procedures shall be in accordance with
                    MIL-STD-105D Normal II level.  The following acceptance
                    tests may be performed in accordance with the following
                    AQLs on a representative lot sample.

                    Workmanship                 4.0 AOL
                    Mechanical Critical         1.5 AQL
                    Electrical, Functional,
                    Parametric and
                    Print Quality

          6.2.2     Definitions

                    The following definitions shall apply: 

                                       28
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  


                    *Workmanship shall be defined as that criteria specified by
                    PRINTWARE workmanship Standard Number 700000.

                    *Mechanical, Critical shall be defined as any physical
                    error, omission, or specification, deviation which affects
                    assembly, functionality or appearance.

                    *Electrical, Functional, and Parametric shall be
                    defined as any defect which results in the inability to
                    meet specification performance requirements.

                    *Print Quality shall be defined by this Specification,
                    section 5.2.

     6.3  Reliability

          6.3.1     Quality and Reliability Documentation

          6.3.2     Reliability Program

                    PRINTWARE shall maintain an ongoing reliability
                    program, the scope of which shall be consistent with the
                    reliability requirements of this specification.

     6.4  Design workload

          The platesetter is designed for a normal workload of 9.9 hours-day,
          5.6 days-week at a 70% printing duty cycle (Duty cycle = print time-
          power on time) which will typically generate 20,000 plates per month.

     6.5  Mean Time Between Service Calls (MTBSC)

          The MTBSC which is realized in the field is a function of the design,
          use and maintenance of the platesetter.  A filed MTBSC design goal of
          [**]  months is based upon the design workload specified in section
          6.4. The platesetter can be used for higher workloads; however, the
          MTBSC will be reduced accordingly.  Service calls to complete PM
          procedures are not included in this goal.

- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       29
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  


7.0   SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

      7.1  Mean Time To Repair (MTTR)

           An MTTR of less than thirty (30) minutes is achieved by the use of
           functional packaging and modular design. The enclosure is designed to
           provide easy access to all areas of the platesetter. Troubleshooting
           is facilitated by the presence of the self test and diagnostic
           display indicators.  In addition to design features inherent to the
           platesetter, the realization of MTTR objectives requires adequate
           service training and proper spares provisioning.

     7.2   Availability of spare Parts

           PRINTWARE shall supply replacement parts for a minimum period of not
           less than five years from date of last shipment.  Specific
           availability requirements shall be referenced in the applicable OEM
           purchase agreement.

     7.3   Useful Life

           The platesetter shall have a useful life of 5 years or 1 million
           plates, whichever comes first.

     7.4   Preventive Maintenance   

           PM should be performed according to the Platesetter Preventive
           Maintenance Schedule.  This schedule is based upon the platesetter
           being used in accordance with its design workload.  The Preventive
           Maintenance Schedule is contained within the 1440 MP Platesetter
           Field Service Manual.

           Normal operator actions, such as plate material and toner loading,
           cutter replacement, and general cleaning are not considered to be in
           the PM schedule.


                                       30
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  


8.0  RASTER SCAN VIDEO INTERFACE

     The platesetter shall be provided with a Raster Scan Video interface. 
     Refer to Figure 8.1 and Printware specification number 700125 for physical,
     electrical, and software interface requirements.

9.0  IDENTIFICATION

     9.1  Logo

          The logos shall be silkscreened on the front of the platesetter at the
          location shown on Figure 1.1.

     9.2  Identification Plate

          An identification plate shall be securely affixed at the location
          shown by Figure 1.1. Figure 9.1 shows the identification plate.

10.0 SHIPPING AND HANDLING

     10.1 Delivery

          Preparation for delivery shall include unit packaging capable of
          meeting National Safe Transit Association Project 1 and carton
          marking information as follows:

          -    Purchase Order Number 
          -    Part Number

     10.2 Accessories Shipped With Platesetter

          The following specified accessories shall be shipped with the
          platesetter:

          -Operator Manual

                                       31
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  


          - Installation procedure

     10.3 Shipping Documents

11.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION

     11.1 1440 MP Platesetter Illustrated Parts List 

          Printware Part Number 800TBD

     11.2 Cable

          PRINTWARE Specification Number 700125

Figures:  1.1  1440 Platesetter
          3.1  Recommended Installation Clearances
          3.2  Warning Labels
          3.3  Agency Labels
          4.1  Control Panel
          5.1  Right Angle Accuracy Test
          5.2  Print Field
          8.1  Connector Socket
          9.1  I.D. Plates


                                       32
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  






                    [DRAWING DEPICTING THE 1440 PLATESETTER]




                        FIGURE 1.1 THE 1440 PLATESETTER










                [DRAWING DEPICTING 1440 PLATESETTER INSTALLATION
                          CLEARANCE RECOMMENDATION]





                 FIGURE 3.1 RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION CLEARANCES


                                       33
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  





                 [DRAWING DEPICTING OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL]





                  FIGURE 4.1 1440 OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL

                                       34
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  





                    [DRAWING OF CONTROL PANEL FLOW CHART]





                     FIGURE 4.2 CONTROL PANEL FLOW CHART

                                       35
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     
                     SPECIFICATION      Date
                                        Page  










[DRAWING ON UPPER LEFTHAND           [DRAWING ON UPPER RIGHTHAND
SIDE OF PAGE DEPICTING               SIDE OF PAGE DEPICTING PLATE
DIMENSIONS OF PRINT FIELD]                IMAGING SPECIFICATIONS]





FIGURE 5.1 MAXIMUM PRINT FIELD        FIGURE 5.2 PLATE IMAGING SPECIFICATIONS




                     [DRAWING ON BOTTOM OF PAGE DEPICTS
                        EXTERNAL VIEW OF CONNECTOR]


                    FIGURE 8.1 EXTERNAL VIEW OF CONNECTOR

                                       36
    

<PAGE>

   


                       ZIPRIP TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PROCESSORS
     Motorola 68030 enhanced 32-bit microprocessor running at 25MHz.
     Printware proprietary Graphics Processor and dual Pixel Processor ASIC
     devices.

MEMORY
     RAM:        8MB standard (user upgradeable to 12, 16, 20, 32,
                 36, 48, 52 and 64MB)
     Hard Disk:  High speed 20MB fixed disc for font, program
                 storage and application use.  Optional 40MB (and larger) drives
                 available.
                 800MB WORM (write once, read many) optical disk option
                 available.

LANGUAGE COMPATIBILITY/EMULATIONS
     PostScript language (via Printstyle)
     Printset - Printware native command set
     Autologic - ICL

FONT SUPPORT
     35 outline masters included
     Additional typefaces supported: PostScript Type 1 and Type 3, Printware
     library (Bitstream).
     Size from 2 - 720 points

INTERFACES
     Two (2) RS-232C Serial ports with baud rate selections up to 38.4 kbps
     Parallel port (Centronics)
     AppleTalk port
     RS-422 port
     Asynchronous SCSI part

OUTPUT PARTS
     Bidirectional 8-bit parallel command/data interface to output device
     Bidirectional serial command/data interface to output device

IMAGE OUTPUT
     Resolution:    300 dpi to 4000 dpi
     Image region:  Vertical page addressing to 128K pixels
                    Horizontal page addressing to 512K pixels

IMAGING SPEED
     Call for Seybold test results (pending)
     Output bandwidth:   Up to 6MB/sec


                                       37
    

<PAGE>

   

     PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS:
                         (Printed circuit assembly only)   (Standard enclosure)

     Width               14 inches                          21 inches
     Depth               12 inches                          15.5 inches
     Height              1.25 inches                        6.5 inches

POWER REQUIREMENTS
     + 5 Volts, +/- 5% @ 8 amps maximum           US and Canada - 115V, 60Hz
     + 1 2 Volts, +/- 10% @ 2 amps maximum        International - 220/240V, 50Hz
     - 12 Volts, +/- 10% @ 25 milliamps maximum

                                       38
    

<PAGE>

   


                                                                      7/19/90
ADDENDUM TO 1440 MP SPECIFICATION


The following are clarifications and additions to the 1440 MP specification. 
This is intended to define the configuration and design goals of the first three
units to be built and delivered to POLYCHROME.

PARAGRAPH

1.1,1.2   Any dimensional changes will be mutually agreed upon in advance.
3.3.1

1.2       The design goal of the 1440 MP is as described in paragraph
          1.2. For the three units to be delivered to POLYCHROME the following
          image repeatability tolerances will be acceptable:

          For plates 12 inches wide and above: +/- .010 true position

          For plates less than 12 inches wide: +/- .015 true position

2.1,3.4.1 These three units will have only FCC approval and no other
          agency listing
3.6.1     or approval.  The first unit to be delivered will not
          be tested.  FCC testing will be done on the second or third unit.  Any
          modifications required for FCC compliance will be installed into all
          three units at no additional charge.

9.0       POLYCHROME will supply paint definition and artwork for any
          logos by 9/1/90.

Figure 4.2  The flowchart for the 1440 PS will not be the same as
            the 1440 MP but will be very similar.

          Any materials used in the construction of the 1440 MP which are
          immersed in toner under normal use will not deteriorate the
          performance or life of the toner.

                                       39
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     800 953-TAB
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     A
                     SPECIFICATION      Date         6/21/90
                                        Page  




PRINTWARE INC. CONFIDENTIAL


ORIGINATOR              ENGINEERING                QUALITY
J. Amdahl               R. F. Pliml, 1/22/91       8/28


                                       40
    

<PAGE>

   

                                        Spec No.     800 953-TAB
PRINTWARE, INC.      ENGINEERING        Revision     A
                     SPECIFICATION      Date         6/21/90
                                        Page  


- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
| REV. | ECO    |                                    |         |       |
| NO.  | NO.    | REVISION DESCRIPTION               |DATE     |APP'D |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
| A    | 02539  | Initial Release                    |10/23/90 |116/91|
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
|------|--------|------------------------------------|---------|-------|
|      |        |                                    |         |       |
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                       41
    

<PAGE>

   

                                PRINTWARE INC.

                                   1440 PS


                        ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL

                         PART NUMBER 800953-TAB REV

                           CONFIDENTIAL MATERIAL
                      NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT REQUIRED


                                       42
    

<PAGE>

   

                                  PRINTWARE
                        ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                              P/N 800953-TAB REV

1.0  SCOPE

This document establishes the requirements for the lithographic printing plate
to be used in the Printware Model 1440es Platemaker.

A lithographic Electrostatic printing plate consists of an offset master base
paper and an electrophotographic layer.  It is to be imaged in the Printware
Model 1440es Platemaker in the following sequence:

     Charging
     Exposure by laser diode
     Liquid electrostatic toner development
     Heating to dry and fuse the toner

This printing plate will be run on commercially available manual and automatic
offset presses after the plate has been treated with an electrostatic conversion
solution.

For purposes of periodic audits, characterization and qualification, evaluations
shall be made to the limits of this document and specified reference documents.

Specified values within this specification without tolerances shall be regarded
as nominal values.

2.0  DOCUMENTS
Applicable documents, of issue in effect on the date of invitation for bid, form
a part of this specification.

Order of precedence shall be as follows:


     2.1  Applicable OEM Purchase Agreement
     2.2  This Document
     2.3  MIL-STD-105D, Sampling Procedure and Tables for Inspection
          by Attributes

                                       43
    

<PAGE>

   


                                   PRINTWARE
                          ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                               P/N 800953-TAB REV

3.0  REQUIREMENTS

     3.1  Physical
     Configuration - Rolls
     Width of roll:

     Dash No.       Roll Width                    Rolls per Box
     --------       ----------                    -------------
     -001           8 inch                             2
     -002           9 inch                             2
     -003           10 inch                            2
     -004           11 inch                            2
     -005           12 inch                            2
     -010           13 inch                            2
     -008           14 inch                            2
     -006           14.563 inch                        2
     -007           15 inch                            2

Winding - Infrared sensitive or coated side out.

Length - 400 feet.

Roll Diameter - Not to exceed 7.5 inches.

Core Diameter - 3 3/4" ID, 4 1/4" OD.

Core Width - Roll width = 1/64 inch.

Basis Weight - 110 lb/3300 ft.

[**]

3.2  Mechanical

3.2.1     Plate must be machine compatible with the Printware Model 1440es
          Platesetter.

3.2.2     Plate must be acceptable to handling under normal press operating
          conditions.

     3.2.3     Plate must work with common convertors, both off-line and those
     that are on-line with offset presses.

- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       44
    

<PAGE>

   


PRINTWARE
ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
P/N 800953-TAB REV


3.3       Electrical

3.3.1     Exposure Sensitivity: 780 nm.

3.3.2     Charge acceptance: TBD

3.3.3     Dark decay: TBD

3.3.4     Laser light decay: TBD

                                       45
    

<PAGE>

   


                                   PRINTWARE
                          ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                               P/N 800953-TAB REV

3.4  Environmental

Electrostatic Plate Material shall be capable of meeting all functional and
performance requirements of this specification when operated within the combined
environments shown without requiring any adjustments.

              Ambient Temp.       Relative Humidity        Altitude
              -------------       -----------------        -----------
Storage       65 to 75 F.            40% to 50%            0-8,200 Ft
Operating     50 to 90 F.            30% to 70%            0-8,200 Ft
Transport     -40 to 122 F.          0% to 99%             0-40,000 Ft

Store in a cool, dry place in original packaging.  Keep in plastic bag when not
in use.

3.5  Performance

3.5.1     The plate shall perform both as a lithographic plate and as a camera
ready copy.

3.5.2  [**]
     - [**]
                    [**]
                    [**]
     - [**]
                    [**]
     - [**]
     - [**]
     - [**]

3.5.3     [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]

3.5.4     Run length - 5000 impressions.

3.5.5     Stretch - around press cylinder, short grain orientation for rolls 12"
or wider, long grain orientation for rolls under 12", less than [**]
impressions.

3.5.6     Shelf  life - 18 months.

- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


                                       46
    

<PAGE>

   


                                  PRINTWARE
                        ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                             P/N 800953-TAB REV


4.0  QUALITY

4.1 Quality

Product design, material selection and manufacturing workmanship shall be in
accordance with standard industry practices such that products meet PRINTWARE
INC. incoming quality requirements per paragraph 4.2 of this specification. 
PRINTWARE INC. reserves the right to conduct in-plant surveillance of vendor
operations to assure that quality procedures comply with contractual
requirements.

4.2  Incoming Requirements

The indicated Receiving Inspection criteria shall be used to determine
acceptability of lot quality levels.  All inspection procedures shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-105D Normal II level.  The following incoming acceptance
procedure indicated in Appendix I shall be performed in accordance with the
following AQL's on a representative lot sample as specified.

Workmanship                                  0.65 AQL
Mechanical Criteria and Electrical           0.65 AQL

4.3  Identification

Each roll shall have an identification number to identify the order (lot#) and
roll.


   xxxx - yyy - zz
     |     |    ||        
     |     |    ||________Position across jumbo roll width (A to E)
     |     |    |________M (middle), T (top), B (bottom) as taken from jumbo 
     |     |             roll diameter (1-25, where 1 is the top)
     |     |____________Jumbo roll #
     |_______________Order #

The identification number shall be stamped on the end of the roll as close to
the core as possible.

Each box of plate material is to be marked with the order# (lot#) and jumbo
roll#. 


                                       47
    

<PAGE>

   




                                   PRINTWARE
                          ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL
                               P/N 800953-TAB REV

5.0  SHIPPING AND HANDLING

Preparation for delivery shall include unit packaging capable of protecting the
unit when shipped using a commercial common carrier.  PRINTWARE reserves the
right to test packaging to National Safe transit Association (NSTA) to verify
compliance.

Pallet size -  8" - 11 1/4" 120 rolls:
          a.   120 rolls, 60 cartons/pallet
               (4 tiers, 15 cartons/tier)
          b.   96 rolls, 48 cartons/pallet
               (4 tiers, 12 cartons/tier)
          12" - 18" rolls:
          40 rolls, 20 cartons/pallet
          (2 tiers, 10 cartons/tier)

Artwork master for box label to be approved by Printware, Inc. (See Figure 1.)

6.0  DESIGN OR PROCESS CHANGES

Notification of any process changes, design changes or material changes that
will affect fit, form or function, shall be made to PRINTWARE Purchasing
Department prior to shipment of the unit.
The information submitted shall include a complete description of the change and
the effect the change will have on characteristics specified or unspecified of
the unit.  The design, materials and manufacturing process upon which approval
was based, shall be the reference to which requested changes will be compared.

7.0  APPROVED VENDOR LIST

S. D. Warren Company, Westbrook, Maine 04092 


                                       46
    

<PAGE>

   


                                                  APPENDIX I - 6/19/90 Updated

                           IR EP MASTER SPECIFICATION
                               (TEST ENVIRONMENT)

                        S. D. WARREN GRADE CODE - 4132

                PRINTWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 800953-TAB


TEST LOCATION(S):

     1.   S.D. Warren (Westbrook) - QUALITY CERTIFIER
     2.   Printware - QUALITY MONITOR

TEST CONDITION:

1.  Imaging:   - Hardware: Printware 1440 Platesettter
               - Environment: 67-77  F, 35-55% RH
               - Toner: Printware 802217 or 802222 (Specifications in
                 Appendix II)
               - Laser: Calibrated by Printware
               - Fuser setting 40% - 80%
               - Test Image: Process Control Test Image (Appendix III)
               - Laser:  Dial - 0 to 10
                         Top adjustment - 1/4 to 3/4
               - Corona: AC - from 8 - 10
                         DC - full operational range
               - Toner Bias:  Full operational range

               2.  Conversion:     - Hardware: Prepco TP-16 convertor with a 18
               rpm motor option, note that the plate must also be useable with
               Deluxe model 105 convertor.
               - Solution: Printware Conversion Solution 802239 (no more than 1
               week old)

3. Printing:   - Press: A.B. Dick 360
               - Ink: Multigraphics CS 274-5 with tack range of 16 - 20
               - Fountain Solution: Printware Fountain Solution mixed by volume:
                  19 parts deionized or distilled water
                   8 parts isopropyl alcohol
                   5 parts fountain solution
               - Stripe: Ink form rollers to plate 3/16"
                         Plate to blanket 3/16" 
                         Blanket to impression 3/16" 
               - Speed: 7200 - 8000 impressions per hour
               - Paper: Nekoosa 23# or 24# MICR bond 8.5" x 11"

                                       49


<PAGE>


                                                  APPENDIX I - 6/19/90 Updated

                            IR EP MASTER SPECIFICATION

                               (TEST ENVIRONMENT)

                          S. D. WARREN GRADE CODE - 4132

                     PRINTWARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 800953-TAB

          - Plate size and press orientation:
                a.   12" or wider rolls: 10" x roll width
                     with the roll width or short grain dimension around the
                     plate cylinder.
                b.   under 12" wide rolls: roll width x 15"
                     with the 15" long grain dimension around the plate
                     cylinder.
          -    Blanket wash: AM Blankrola Power Solve
          -    Environment: 67-77  F, 45-55% RH

TEST SAMPLES:

[**]


- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406. 
Revised 6-26-90


                                       50


<PAGE>

                                                                Revised 6-20-90

                                 APPENDIX II
                       PRINTWARE TONER SPECIFICATION

     FUNCTIONAL PROPERTIES:                   821630              802217

     Charge to mass ratio (Kg/Coulomb)         [**]                 [**]  
                                              --------            ----------
     Total charge (Microcolombs)               [**].                [**]  
                                              --------            ----------
     Conductivity (Picomhos/Cm)                [**]                 [**]  
                                              --------            ----------
     Optical density                           [**]                 [**]       
                                              --------            ----------
     % Solids                                  [**]                 [**]       
                                              --------            ----------


- -------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406. 


                                       51


<PAGE>

                                 APPENDIX III


               [DRAWING DEPICTING PROCESS CONTROL TEST IMAGE] 


                                       52

    
<PAGE>
   


                      [PRINTWARE ARTWORK FOR BOX LABEL]

                                        53

    




<PAGE>
                                                                   EXHIBIT 10.11

Certain portions of this Exhibit have been deleted and filed separately with the
Commission pursuant to Rule 406.  (Spaces corresponding to deleted portions
appear in brackets with asterisks.)

                               PURCHASE AGREEMENT


This agreement executed as of the first day of January, 1995 by and between
Printware, Inc. ("Seller") and Deluxe Corporation ("Buyer").

1.   Sale and Purchase of Products.  During the term of this agreement Buyer
     agrees to purchase from Seller, upon the terms and conditions set forth
     herein, 1440 Electrostatic Plate Material ("plate material") as per
     performance specifications referenced in Schedule A entitled "Plate
     Material-Premium; Spec No. D802222" and/or "Plate Material - Platinum;
     Spec. No. D804444" attached hereto and made a part of this agreement
     (Products).  It is understood and agreed, that during each calendar year of
     the term hereof, Buyer will purchase from Seller [**] rolls of plate 
     material.  Each roll of platinum-plate material will be counted as 
     1.0625 rolls for calculation of total purchases.

2.   Prices.  During the term of this agreement, the prices for Products
     hereunder shall be as follows:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                  ROLL           PRICE
DELUXE#      PRODUCT #         DIMENSIONS       PER ROLL            ORDER LEAD TIME
- -------      ---------         ----------       --------            ---------------
<S>         <C>             <C>                 <C>         <C>
Q201021     802222-105      12" X 400 ft.         [**]      3 months in advance of purchase
Q201022     802222-106      14.563" X 400 ft.     [**]      3 months in advance of purchase
T201068     804444-105      12" X 425 ft.         [**]      3 months in advance of purchase
T201069     804444-106      14.563" X 425 ft.     [**]      3 months in advance of purchase

</TABLE>

3.   Shipping.  Title and risk of loss shall pass to Buyer F.O.B. origin. 
     Charges for freight from the F.O.B. point, handling and insurance are the
     responsibility of Buyer.

4.   Term.  This agreement shall (unless terminated as provided below) be in
     effect for the period from January 1, 1995 through December 31, 1997.


- ---------------
Brackets with asterisks correspond to deleted text that is subject to a 
confidential treatment request filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 406.

<PAGE>

5.   Termination.  This agreement may be terminated:

     a.   by either party in the event of a breach of contract, upon thirty (30)
          days prior written notice to the breaching party unless the breach is
          cured within such 30-day period; or

     b.   by either party upon written notice effective immediately if the other
          party becomes insolvent, files or has filed against it any bankruptcy
          petition, or makes any general assignment for the benefit of its
          creditors.

6.   Warranty.  Seller warrants to the Buyer that the Products furnished
     hereunder will be in full conformance to the specifications set forth in
     Schedule A.  Buyer may at its option, return to Seller for replacement or
     full credit any Products which do not meet the performance specifications
     herein.  Seller will complete corrective action within two weeks of initial
     contact.

7.   Payment.  A separate invoice shall be issued for each shipment made under
     this agreement.  Invoices shall not be issued prior to delivery of the
     goods.  Payment for each invoice shall be made within thirty (30) days
     after date of invoice.  No extra charges will be allowed unless
     specifically agreed to in writing by Buyer.  The payment of an invoice does
     not constitute acceptance of the goods covered by the invoice.

8.   Force Majeure.  Neither party shall be deemed in default if its performance
     or obligations hereunder are delayed or become impossible or impractical
     due to acts of God, war, fire, earthquake, strike, accident or acts of
     civil or military authority.  Force Majeure events shall not include delays
     in transportation, shortages of material, or delays by suppliers.

9.   Amendments.  This agreement may be modified only by writings duly signed by
     authorized representatives of both parties.

10.  Entire Agreement.  This agreement, including the exhibits hereto,
     constitutes the entire agreement between Seller and Buyer with respect to
     the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior discussions,
     correspondence and understandings between the parties relating thereto.



<PAGE>

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date
first above written.

PRINTWARE, INC.                              DELUXE CORPORATION               
                                                                              
By:   /s/ Thomas W. Petschauer               By:   /s/ Jay B. Skutt           
   ------------------------------------         ------------------------------
                                                                              
Name:   Thomas W. Petschauer   11/14/94      Name:   Jay Skutt       11/10/94 
     ----------------------------------           ----------------------------
                                                                              
Title:   Vice President Finance and          Title:  Senior Vice President    
            Administration                             Manufacturing          
      ---------------------------------            ---------------------------


<PAGE>


                                   SCHEDULE A 


- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
   PRINTWARE INC.          ENGINEERING             SPEC NO.   D802222 
                          SPECIFICATION            REVISION   L       
                                                   DATE       11/05/93
                                                   PAGE       1 of 10 
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------


                             PLATE MATERIAL-PREMIUM




                           PRINTWARE INC. CONFIDENTIAL
                                        



- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
ORIGINATOR           ENGINEERING        MANUFACTURING        QUALITY

PETE KENNEDY         RICK PLIML         WAYNE DREYER         ROD CERAR
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------


<PAGE>

                                  SCHEDULE A


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222
REVISION  L
DATE      11/05/93
PAGE      1 of 10



                            PLATE MATERIAL-PREMIUM


                         PRINTWARE INC. CONFIDENTIAL




ORIGINATOR       PETE KENNEDY   

ENGINEERING      RICK PLIML     

MANUFACTURING    WAYNE DREYER   

QUALITY          ROD CERAR

<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      2 of 10

                               REVISION HISTORY

REV  ECO
NO   NO      REVISION DESCRIPTION                         DATE        APP'D
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 E   04367   Change speed spec                            11/18/93    Rick Pliml

 F   04748   Add surface roughness requirement            06/22/94    Rick Pliml

 G   04817   Add curl specification                       08/11/94    Rick Pliml

 H   04896   Curl changed from 1.5 inch to 2.0 inch       11/10/94    Alex Koss

 J   04926   Add specking specification                   11/17/94    Alex Koss

 K   04942   Raise density spec and change speed          12/14/94    Alex Koss
             specification                      

 L   04992   Change background density spec.              1/16/95     Alex Koss

<PAGE>



PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      3 of 10


                    PRINTWARE ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL


1.0  SCOPE

This document establishes the requirements for the lithographic printing 
plate to be used in the Printware model 1440 ES, 1440 ZN, 1440MP and 144OEZ 
Platesetters.

This lithographic electrostatic printing plate consists of an offset master 
base paper and an electrophotographic layer.  It is designed to be imaged in 
the Printware model 1440 ES, 1440 ZN, 1440 MP and 1440 EZ Platesetters in the 
following sequence.

     Charging
     Exposure by laser diode
     Liquid electrostatic toner development
     Heating to dry and fuse the toner

This printing plate will be run on commercially available manual and 
automatic offset presses after the plate has been with an electrostatic 
conversion solution.

For the purposes of periodic audits, characterization and qualification, 
evaluations shall be made to the limits of this document and specified 
reference documents.

Specified values within this specification without tolerances shall be 
regarded as nominal values.

<PAGE>



PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      4 of 10


2.0  REQUIREMENTS

2.1  PHYSICAL

Configuration - Rolls.

Winding - Infrared sensitive or coated side out.

Length - 400 feet

Roll Diameter - Not to exceed 7.5 inches.

Core Diameter - 3 3/4" ID, 4 1/4  OD

Roll Width - as indicated plus/minus 1/64 inch.

Core Width - Roll Width + 0 - 1/8 inch.
Width of roll; Premium grade:

Dash #    Roll Width          Rolls Per Box
- ------    ----------          -------------
- -105      12 inch                  2
- -106      14.563 inch              2

Basis Weight - 95 lb/3300 ft2, economy grade; 101 lb/3300 ft2, premium grade.

Caliper - [**], economy grade; [**], premium grade.

Surface Roughness - Not to exceed [**] as measured by a Parker Print Surf
tester.

2.2  MECHANICAL

2.2.1     The plate must be compatible with all Printware model 1440
          Platesetters.

2.2.2     The plate must be acceptable to handling under normal press operating
          conditions.

2.2.3     The plate must work with common converters, both off-line and
          those that are on line with offset presses.

- ---------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      5 of 10


2.2.4     Exposure Sensitivity: 780 mm.

2.2.5     Charge acceptance: 660 Volts plus/minus 25 Volts

2.2.6     [**]

2.2.7     Laser light decay level:    30 volts

2.2.8     Conductivity: (using a Kethley cell #6105 at 500 volts) 
          3.5 x 10- 7 mhos

2.4       OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

Electrostatic Plate Material shall be capable of meeting all functional and 
performance requirements of this specification when operated within the 
combined environments shown without requiring any formulation adjustments.

              Ambient Temp.   Rel. Humidity    Altitude
              -------------   --------------   -----------
Storage       65 to 75 F       40% to 50%      0-8,200 ft.
Operation     50 to 90 F       30% to 70%      0-8,200 ft.
Transport     -40 to 122 F      0% to 99%      0-40,000 ft.

Store in a cool dry place in original packaging.  Keep in plastic bag when 
not in use.

2.5       PERFORMANCE

2.5.1     The plate shall perform both as a lithographic plate and as a
          camera ready copy.

2.5.2     [**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]



- ---------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      6 of 10


2.5.3     [**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]
          -[**]

2.5.4     Run length, premium grade = 10,000 impressions

2.5.5     Stretch, premium grade - around press cylinder, short grain
          orientation for rolls 12" or wider, long grain orientation 
          for rolls under 12", [**].

2.5.6     Shelf life = 18 months.

2.5.7     Image density as a function of corona setting - The image density
          shall not drop more [**].

2.5.8     Image density with 804115 toner - The image density shall be a
          minimum of .98 when using a fresh load of 804115 toner.

2.5.9     Speed Range

               Laser Power
               (plus/minus 5%) Milliwatts

- -------------------------------------------
Maximum        [**]

Optimum        [**]

Minimum        [**]

     The speed of the material shall be referenced in test results and any
     customer information by the number indicated on the platesetter operator
     panel.





- ---------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      7 of 10


     Quality assurance testing must be done only on a properly calibrated
     Platesetter per Printware procedure C92-2 for the 1440 ES model or
     procedure C92-6 for the 1440 ZN.  Laser power variation between calibrated
     platesetters will fall within the range indicated.

     The plate material is acceptable only if it is found to have either:

     a) [**]
     or
     b) [**]

2.5.10    Curl

As a cut plate, the material shall not curl any more than 2.0 inch.  Curl is to
be measured after converting the plate twice thru a Prepco TP 16 converter or
equivalent.  Curl is then measured by laying the plate, image up, on a flat
surface table top and measuring between any edge or corner and the table
surface.

2.5.11    Specking

[**]

3.0  QUALITY

3.1  Product design, material selection and manufacturing workmanship shall
     be in accordance with standard industry practices such that products meet
     Printware Inc. incoming quality requirements per paragraph 3.2 of this
     specification.  Printware Inc. reserves the right to conduct in plant
     surveillance of vendor operations to assure that quality procedures comply
     with contractual requirements.









- ---------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      8 of 10


3.2  Incoming requirements

The indicated receiving inspection criteria shall be used to determine
acceptability of lot quality levels.  All inspection procedures shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-105D Normal II level.

3.3  Identification

Each roll shall have an identification number to allow traceability of its
manufacture.

XXXXX - Quality Control Lot #
XX   Position across jumbo roll

# of set as taken from jumbo roll diameter

The identification number shall be stamped on the end of the roll as close to
the core as possible.

Each box of plate material is to be marked with the quality control lot #.


4.0  SHIPPING AND HANDLING

Preparation for delivery shall include unit packaging capable of protecting the
unit when shipped using a common commercial carrier.  Printware reserves the
right to test packaging to National Safe Transit Association (NSTA) to verify
compliance.

Pallet size -  12" rolls:
               a. 36 rolls, 18 cartons/pallet
                    (3 tiers, 6 cartons/tier)

               14 9/16" rolls
               24 rolls, 12 cartons/pallet
                    (2 tiers, 6 cartons/tier)

Artwork master or box label to be approved by Printware, Inc.


<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      9 of 10


5.0  DESIGN AND PROCESS CHANGES

Notification of any process changes, design changes or material changes that
will affect fit, form or function, shall be made to Printware Purchasing
Department prior to shipment of the unit.  The information submitted shall
include a complete description of the change and the effect the change will have
on characteristics specified or unspecified of the unit.  The design, materials
and manufacturing process upon which approval was based, shall be the reference
to which requested changes will be compared.


6.0  APPROVED VENDOR LIST

E.J. Gaisser Inc.
49 Liberty Place
Stamford, Connecticut  06902


                       E.J. Gaisser Grade Code - LT496
                             (Test Environment)

                Printware Technical Specification D802222-TAB

TEST LOCATIONS:

     1.   E.J. Gaisser (Stamford) - Quality Certifier
     2.   Printware - Quality Monitor

TEST CONDITION:

1. Imaging:         -Hardware:  Printware 1440 Platesetter
                    -Environment:  67-77 F; 35-55% RH
                    -Toner:  Printware 821630 or 804115
                    -Laser:  Calibrated per procedure C92-2 or C92-6
                    -Fuser setting 40%-80%
                    -Test Image:  Process control test image
                    -Laser dial:  0 - 999 for ES model
                            0% - 99% for ZN model<PAGE>

<PAGE>


PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  D802222

PAGE      10 of 10


2. Conversion: -Hardware:  PrepcoTP-16 converter with an 18 rpm
                motor option, note that the plate must also be usable with 
                Deluxe model 105 converter.
               -Solution:  Printware conversion solution 802239 or
                803185-TAB (no more than one week old).

3. Printing:   -Press:  AM Multigraphics Model 1850
               -Ink:  AM Multigraphics Electrostatic black ink
               -Fountain solution:  Printware fountain solution mixed by volume:
                    25 parts deionized or distilled water
                    2 parts anhydrous isopropyl alcohol
                    5 parts conversion solution
               -Stripe:  Ink from rollers to plate 3/16"
                    Plate to blanket 3/16"
                    Blanket to impression 3/16"
               -Speed: 6000 - 8000 impressions per hour
               -Paper: Mead Chief 11" x 17"
               -Plate size and press orientation:
               -Blanket wash: AM Blankrola Power Solve
               -Environment: 67-77 F, 45-55% RH

TEST SAMPLES:  -[**]

               -[**]













- ---------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444
REVISION  D
DATE      9/15/94
PAGE      1 of 13







                               PRINTWARE, INC.





                                  "PLATINUM"

                      1440 ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL






                     Part Number 804444-TAB, D804444-TAB


                         Printware, Inc. CONFIDENTIAL

ORIGINATOR        Peter Kennedy  

ENGINEERING       Alex Koss 

MANUFACTURING     Joe Dayton     

QUALITY            Rod Cerar

<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      2 of 13


REV   ECO
NO    NO     REVISION DESCRIPTION                       DATE       APP'D
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 A    04395  Initial Release                            9/15/94    Peter Kennedy

 B    05108  Remove reference to "Gold", change
             speed spec, change roll length             5/9/95     Alex Koss

 C    05122  Change Caliper Spec. to [**]               6/15/95    Alex Koss

 D    05313  Change solids and background density       2/19/96    Alex Koss
- ----------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A 
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      3 of 13


                      PRINTWARE ELECTROSTATIC PLATE MATERIAL

1.0  SCOPE

This document establishes the requirements for the lithographic printing plate
to be used in the Printware model 1440 ES, 1440 ZN, 1440 MP and 1440 EX
Platesetters.

This lithographic electrostatic printing plate consists of an offset master base
paper and an electrophotographic layer.  It is designed to be imaged in the
Printware model 1440 ES, 1440 ZN, 1440 MP and 1440 EZ Platesetters in the
following sequence.

          Charging
          Exposure by laser diode
          Liquid electrostatic toner development
          Heating to dry and fuse the toner

This printing plate will be run on commercially available manual and automatic
offset presses after the plate has been treated with an electrostatic conversion
solution.

For the purposes of periodic audits, characterization and qualification,
evaluations shall be made to the limits of this document and specified reference
documents.

Specified values within this specification without tolerances shall be regarded
as nominal values.

2.0  REQUIREMENTS         

2.1  PHYSICAL

Configuration - Rolls.

Winding - Infrared sensitive or coated side out.

Length - 425 feet.

Roll Diameter - Not to exceed 7.5 inches.

Roll Width - as indicated plus/minus 1/64 inch.


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      4 of 13


Core Width - Roll Width plus/minus 1/8 inch.

[**]

Width of roll; Platinum grade:

Dash #              Roll Width               Rolls Per Box

- -102                9 inch                        2
- -103                10 inch                       2
- -104                11 inch                       2
- -105                12 inch                       2
- -110                13 inch                       2
- -106                14.563 inch                   2
- -107                15 inch                       2
- -112                15.5 inch                     2
- -111                15.75 inch                    2
- -109                16 inch                       2

Basis Weight - 108 lb/3300 ft2.

[**]

[**]

[**]

2.2 MECHANICAL

2.2.1     The plate must be compatible with all Printware model 1440
          Platesetters.

2.2.2     The plate must be acceptable to handling under normal press operating
          conditions.

2.2.3     The plate must work with common converters, both off-line and
          those that are on line with offset presses.

- ----------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      5 of 13

2.2.4     The plate must be capable of being used with all commercial
          automatic press insertion devices.

2.3       MECHANICAL

2.3.1     Exposure Sensitivity: 780 nm.

2.3.2     Charge acceptance: 600 Volts plus/minus 25 Volts

2.3.3     [**]

2.3.4     Laster light decay level: plus/minus 30 Volts

2.3.5     Conductivity: (using a Keithley cell #6105 at 500 Volts) 
          3.5 x 10-7 mhos

2.4       OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENT

Electrostatic Plate Material shall be capable of meeting all functional and
performance requirements of this specification when operated within the combined
environments shown without requiring any formulation adjustments.

               Ambient Temp.          Rel. Humidity       Altitude

Storage        65 to 75  F              40% to 50%          0-8,200 ft.
Operation      50 to 90  F              30% to 70%          0-8,200 ft.
Transport      -40 to 122  F            0% to 99%           0-40,000 ft.

Store in a cool dry place in original packaging.  Keep in plastic bag when not
in use.

2.5       PERFORMANCE

2.5.1     The plate shall perform both as a lithographic plate and as a camera
          ready copy.

2.5.2     [**]


- ----------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      6 of 13



     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]

2.5.3     [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]
     -    [**]

2.5.4     Run length, = 10,000 impressions

2.5.5     Stretch, - around press cylinder, short grain orientation for
          rolls 12" or wider, long grain orientation for rolls under 12", [**].

2.5.6     Shelf life = 18 months.

2.5.7     Image density as a function of corona setting - The image density
          shall not drop more than [**].

2.5.8     Image density with 804115 toner - The image density shall be a
          minimum of [**] when using a fresh load of 804115 toner.

2.5.9     Curl - Less than 1/2" (measured laying flat on a table, from table top
          up to corners of plate) after two passes through a Prepco TP-16
          converter filled with Printware Conversion Solution (part #803185-001,
          803185-001).

2.5.10    Speed Range

Laser Power         50k Potentiometer        Equiv. Laser
Exposure            Setting                  Power (plus/minus 5%) Milliwatts 

Maximum             800                      [**]


- -------------------

BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      7 of 13

Laser Power         50k Potentiometer        Equiv. Laser
Exposure            Setting                  Power (plus/minus 5%) Milliwatts 

Optimum             600                      [**]

Minimum             500                      [**]

The speed of the material shall be referenced in test results and any customer
information by the number indicated on the potentiometer dial.

The equivalent laser power is given here as reference and assumes that the
Platesetter laser power has been calibrated per Printware procedure C92-2 for
the 1440 ES model or procedure C92-6 for the 1440 ZN.  Laser power variation
between calibrated platesetters will fall within the range indicated.  Quality
assurance testing must be done only on a properly calibrated Platesetter.

The plate material is acceptable only if the image quality is acceptable (plate
per paragraph 2.5.2 and press per paragraph 2.5.3) over a laser power range of
[**].

Optimum speed shall be determined by imaging the Printware process control plate
and inspecting the resolution target for "even eight's".  The laser power
exposure is properly adjusted when the forward eight pixel line (black on white)
is equal in width to the reverse eight pixel line (white on black).  Line width
can be accurately measured using an optical comparitor with .0005 gradations
such as the Digiscope available from Byers Graphic Imaging Systems.  When the
proper exposure is attained, the plate material speed is indicated on the laser
power potentiometer dial.

2.6  ENVIRONMENTAL

2.6.1     Waste Disposal - All materials making up the plate material shall
          be non-toxic, capable of normal disposal and shall be biodegradable 
          to the maximum extent possible.

2.6.2     Ozone Protection - No ozone depleting chemicals shall be used
          either in the plate or in the process used to mare the plate material.




- --------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      8 of 13

3.0  QUALITY

3.1  Product design, material selection and manufacturing workmanship shall
     be in accordance with standard industry practices such that products meet
     Printware Inc., incoming quality requirements per paragraph 3.2 of this
     specification.  Printware Inc. reserves the right to conduct in plant
     surveillance of vendor operations to assure that quality procedures comply
     with contractual requirements.

3.2  Incoming requirements

The indicated receiving inspection criteria shall be used to determine
acceptability of lot quality levels.  All inspection procedures shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-105D Normal II level.

3.3  Identification

Each roll shall have an identification number to allow traceability of its
manufacture.

XXXXX - Quality Control Lot #
XX   Position across jumbo roll
 
# of set as taken from jumbo roll diameter

The identification number shall be stamped on the end of the roll as close to
the core as possible.

Each box of plate material is to be marked with the quality control lot #.

4.0  SHIPPING AND HANDLING

Preparation for delivery shall include unit packaging capable of protecting the
unit when shipped using a common commercial carrier.  Printware reserves the
right to test packaging to National Safe Transit Association (NSTA) to verify
compliance.

Pallet size -       8  - 11 rolls:
                    80 rolls, 40 cartons/pallet
                         (4 tiers, 10 cartons/tier)
                    12"-18" rolls:
                    40 rolls, 20 cartons/pallet
                         (2 tiers, 10 carton/tier)


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      9 of 13


D part number  12" rolls
               36 rolls, 18 cartons/pallet
                    (3 tiers, 6 cartons/tier)
               14 9/16" rolls
               24 rolls, 12 cartons/pallet
                    (2 tiers, 6 cartons/tier)

A carton should contain only one lot number of plate material.

A skid should be packed with no more than two lot numbers total.

Artwork master for box label to be approved by Printware, Inc.

5.0  DESIGN AND PROCESS CHANGES

Notification of any process changes, design changes or material changes that
will affect fit, form or function, shall be made to Printware Purchasing
Department prior to shipment of the unit.  The information submitted shall
include a complete description of the change and the effect the change will have
on characteristics specified or unspecified of the unit.  The design, materials
and manufacturing process upon which approval was based, shall be the reference
to which requested changes will be compared.

6.0  APPROVED VENDOR LIST

E.J. Gaisser Inc.
49 Liberty Place
Stamford, Connecticut 06902

                        Digital Laser Plate Specification
                              (Test Environment)

                   Printware Technical Specification 804444-TAB

TEST LOCATIONS:

1.   E.J. Gaisser (Stamford) - Quality Certifier
2.   Printware - Quality Monitor


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      10 of 13


TEST CONDITION:

1.   Imaging:  - Hardware: Printware 1440 Platesetter
               - Environment: 67-77 F; 40-50% RH
               - Toner: Printware 804115
               - Laser: Calibrated per procedure C92-2 or C92-6
               - Fuser setting 40% - 80%
               - Test Image: Process control test image

2.   Conversion:    - Hardware: Prepco TP-16 converter with an 18
               rpm motor option, note that the plate must also be usable with
               Deluxe model 105 converter.
                         - Solution: Printware conversion solution 802239,
               803185-TAB, 806161-TAB or 806450-TAB (no more than one week old).

3.   Printing: - Press: AM Multigraphics Model 1850
               - Ink: Multigraphics PS-274 Electrostatic black ink
               - Fountain solution: Printware fountain solution mixed by volume:
                    25 parts deionized or distilled water
                    2 parts anhydrous isopropyl alcohol
                    5 parts conversion solution
               - Stripe: Ink form rollers to plate 3/16"
                      Plate to blanket 3/16"
                      Blanket to impression 3/16"
               - Speed: 6000 - 8000 impressions per hour
               - Mead Chief Paper 11" x 17"
               - Blanket wash: AM Blankrola Power Solve
               - Environment: 67-77 F, 40-50% RH


TEST SAMPLES:

[**]




- ------------------------
BRACKETS WITH ASTERIKS CORRESPOND TO DELETED TEXT THAT IS SUBJECT TO A
CONFIDENTIAL TREATMENT REQUEST FILED WITH THE COMMISSION PURSUANT TO RULE 406.

<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      11 of 13


                                 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
                                          5/30/89


                                  SECTION I - IDENTIFICATION

PRINTWARE 1440 PLATESETTER PLATE MATERIAL

Printware, Inc.
1270 Eagan Industrial Road
Eagan, MN 55121
(612) 456-1400

                    SECTION II - HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS/IDENTITY INFO.

Hazardous Components     CAS#      OSHA  PEL ACGIH TLV  %

Zinc Oxide               1314-13-2 10 mg/m3  10 mg/m3  17%
 Total Dust Respirable

Non-Hazardous Components

Paper                    N/A       N/A       N/A       80%
Acrylic Polymer          N/A       N/A       N/A         3%

Disclaimer:
As the conditions or methods of use are beyond our control, we do not assume any
responsibility and expressly disclaim any liability for any use of the material.
Information contained herein is believed to be true and accurate, but all
statements or suggestions are made without any warranty, expressed or implied,
regarding the accuracy of the information, the hazards connected with the use of
the material or the results to be obtained from the use thereof.

                              SECTION III - PHYSICAL DATA

Boiling Pont:            N/A
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg):  N/A
Vapor Density (Air = 1): N/A
Specific Gravity (H20 = 1):   N/A
Melting Point:      N/A


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      12 of 13

Evaporation Rate:        N/A
Solubility in water:     Complete
Appearance and Odor:     Paper odorless

                       SECTION IV - FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD DATA

Flash Point:        N/A
Flammable Limits:   N/A  LEL: N/A  UEL: N/A
Extinguishing Media:     Water
Special Fire Fighting Procedures:       Routine for paper products
Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards:     None

                            SECTION V - REACTIVITY DATA

Stability:               Stable
Hazardous Polymerization:     Will not occur
Conditions to Avoid:          N/A

                         SECTION VI - HEALTH HAZARD DATA

Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic): Prolonged inhalation of high levels of free
fine zinc oxide dust may produce symptoms known as "oxide chills" which have no
recognized complications.  (The zinc oxide in this product as supplied is not in
free form)

Carcinogenicity:    NTP: No   IARC:     No   OSHA Regulated:     No
Signs and Symptoms of Exposure:    None
Medical Conditions Aggravated by Exposure:   None
Emergency First Aid Procedures:    None

                  SECTION VII - PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFE HANDLING AND USE

Steps to be taken in case material is released or spilled:  N/A
Waste Disposal Method:   Standard Paper Disposal
Precautions to be taken in handling and storage:  Store in original packaging in
a cool area (68 -72 F) 40-50% RH


<PAGE>

PRINTWARE, INC.

ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION  

SPEC NO.  804444

PAGE      13 of 13


                       SECTION VIII - CONTROL MEASURES

Respiratory Protection:  None
Ventilation:             Local Exhaust - N/A Mechanical - None
Protective Gloves:       None
Eye Protection:          None
Other:                   None
Work/Hygienic Practices: Standard for handling paper


<PAGE>

                       AMENDMENT TO THE PURCHASE AGREEMENT



This amendment to the Purchase Agreement is made the 12th day of December, 1995,
by and between Printware, Inc. ("Seller") and Deluxe Corporation ("Buyer") and
replaces Paragraph 1 of the Purchase Agreement of January 1995.

1.   SALE AND PURCHASE OF PRODUCTS.  During the term of this agreement Buyer
     agrees to order from Seller, upon the terms and conditions set forth
     herein, 1440 Electrostatic Plate Material ("plate material") as per
     performance specifications referenced in Schedule A entitled "Plate
     Material-Premium; Spec. No. D802222" and/or "Plate Material-Platinum; Spec
     No. D804444" attached hereto and made a part of this agreement (Products). 
     It is understood and agreed, that during each calendar year of the term
     hereof, Buyer will order from Seller not less than 30,000 rolls of plate
     material.  Each roll of platinum-plate material will be counted at 1.0625
     rolls for calculation of total orders.

Except as set forth above, all terms and conditions of the Purchase Agreement
shall remain unchanged and in full force and effect.

PRINTWARE, INC.                              DELUXE CORPORATION               
                                                                              
BY:   /s/ Thomas W. Petschauer               BY:   /s/ Jay B. Skutt           
   ------------------------------------         ------------------------------
                                                                              
NAME:   Thomas W. Petschauer                 NAME:   Jay Skutt    
     ----------------------------------           ----------------------------
                                                                              
TITLE: Executive Vice President Finance      TITLE:  Chief Procurement 
         and Chief Financial Officer                    Officer
      ---------------------------------            ---------------------------

DATE:      12/15/95                          DATE:        12/12/95          
     ----------------------------------           ----------------------------




<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 23.1
 
              INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' CONSENT AND REPORT ON SCHEDULE
 
    We  consent to the use in this Amendment No. 2 to Registration Statement No.
333-3629 of  Printware, Inc.  (the Company)  on  Form S-1  of our  report  dated
February 2, 1996 (April 25, 1996 as to the first paragraph of Note 3), appearing
in the Prospectus, which is part of this Registration Statement. We also consent
to  the  reference  to  us  under the  headings  "Selected  Financial  Data" and
"Experts" in such Prospectus.
 
    Our audits of  the financial  statements referred to  in our  aforementioned
report  also included the financial statement schedule of the Company, listed in
Item 16(b);  this financial  statement  schedule is  the responsibility  of  the
Company's  management. Our responsibility is to  express an opinion based on our
audits. In our opinion,  such financial statement  schedule, when considered  in
relation  to the basic financial statements taken as a whole, presents fairly in
all material respects the information set forth therein.
 
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
 
Minneapolis, Minnesota
June 27, 1996


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission